Yamaha RM1x Specifications

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly
approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with
this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product
in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.
Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not
result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according
to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC
regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can
be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial
type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you
can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena
Park, CA90620
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og
type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma
batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enlight
fabrikantens instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS
• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.
• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.
• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op
het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur
afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing
Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
Tel. 030-2828425
• For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the
end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha
Service Center as follows:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center
Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
Tel
: 030-2828425
• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small
chemical waste.
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply
(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or
adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate,
or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone
could walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire
size for a 25' cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the
AWG number ,the larger the current handling capacity. For longer
extension cords, consult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components supplied
or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart,
etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions
that accompany the accessory product.
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which
(if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this
type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement
becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of
these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being
charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for
the battery being charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with
batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly.
Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and
battery case rupture.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct
at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to
change or modify any of the specifications without notice or
obligation to update existing units.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all
batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly
and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any
retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery
disposal information.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and
headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound
levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate
for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is
uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in
the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some
reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe
all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of
products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is
unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model
number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial number,
and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain
this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory
mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as
optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be
dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are
stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well
secured BEFORE using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No
other uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to
how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as
designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are
therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual
carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and
environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products
and the production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we
want you to be aware of the following:
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-BP
3
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable
parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill
into any openings.
• Use the specified adaptor (PA-5C or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the
instrument or overheating.
• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the
outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may
have accumulated on it.
• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual
smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off
the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the
instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to
the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord,
place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk
on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause
overheating in the outlet.
• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during
electrical storms.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off
the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme
cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the
internal components.
• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as
televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which
can affect proper operation of the other products.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other
cables.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint
thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping
cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the
instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
(3)-3
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and
do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.
If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
■REPLACING THE BACKUP BATTERY
• This instrument contains a non rechargeable internal backup battery which
permits internal data to remain stored even when the power is off. When
the backup battery needs replacing, the message "Backup Battery Low"
will display in the display. When this happens, immediately back up your
data, then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup
battery.
• Do not attempt to replace the backup battery yourself, in order to prevent
the possible serious hazards. Always have qualified Yamaha service
personnel replace the backup battery.
• Never place the backup battery in a location that a child can reach, since a
child might accidentally swallow the battery. If this should happen, consult
a physician immediately.
■SAVING USER DATA
• Always save data to a floppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent the
loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper
use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or
destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
How to use the manuals/Printing conventions in this manual
Owner’s Manual
Introduction
Thank you for choosing a Yamaha RM1x Sequence Remixer.
The RM1x is a complete dance-music workstation that can be used both as a real-time performance instrument and a powerful
production tool. Its intuitive interface makes real-time operation easy for artists with a DJ background, while in-depth sequencing
and editing functions make it possible to create sophisticated original patterns and songs from scratch. In addition to powerful
sequence recording and playback capability, the RM1x also features a great sounding tone generator built in — so you don’t
need any extra equipment. You can even edit the voices to create sounds that are perfectly suited to your music.
Keep this Owner’s Manual handy while familiarizing yourself with the RM1x, and store it in a safe place for later reference.
5
Main Features
Main Features
6
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
•
The sequencer of the RM1x provides 16 sequence tracks and up to 110,000 notes of storage
capacity for professional-level sequencing power. Note timing resolution is 1/480th of a quarter
note. Memory is backed up, so your data will not disappear when the power is turned off.
•
Easy operation with the large 64 x 240 dot display.
•
Intuitive performance control with 8 assignable real-time control knobs, 4 display knobs, and a
large multi-function keyboard.
•
An awesome assortment of preset patterns means you can play right away without having to
program.
•
Easy programming via an advanced interface that allows a wide range of parameters to be accessed
and edited — when you need to be in total control of your sound.
•
Powerful sequencing capabilities with in-depth editing function make it possible to create even
complex patterns and musical textures.
•
Assemble grooves in real time in the Pattern mode: each of the Pattern mode’s “styles” has up to
16 “sections” which can be directly switched in real time during playback via the RM1x keyboard.
•
Advanced tone generator technology gives you a extensive arsenal of outstanding sounds built in.
•
Edit and refine the RM1x voices to create sounds that most ideally suit your own music.
•
A sophisticated multi-effect system can be used to add anything from subtle ambiance to wild
variations.
•
Tap BPM entry lets you define tempos the way you feel them rather than with numbers.
•
Full MIDI compatibility means that the RM1x can be used as the core of a larger music production
system.
How to use the manuals/Printing conventions in this manual
How to use the manuals
The documentation for the RM1x consists of the following two manuals. Understand the role of each manual, and refer to them
as necessary.
❏ Owner's Manual (this manual)
This explains precautions for use, how to make connections, and all parameters and commands. Use this manual like a
dictionary whenever you need to.
Chapter 1. Basic concepts
Chapter 2. Pattern mode
Chapter 3. Pattern Chain mode
Chapter 4. Song mode
Chapter 5. Utility mode
“Pattern mode”, “Pattern chain mode” and “Song mode” have several functions in common.
In this manual, explanations for these common functions are given in greater detail in chapter 2 “Pattern mode”. Some of
the overlapping explanation in chapter 3 “Pattern Chain mode” and chapter 4 “Song mode” is omitted. In such cases, the
appropriate page of chapter 2 “Pattern mode” is indicated so that you can refer to it.
❏ List Book
This is a booklet that contains various lists such as the Voice list, Preset Style list, Effect list, MIDI data format, and MIDI
implementation chart.
Printing conventions in this manual
This manual uses the following icons to indicate buttons and to distinguish different types of information.
p
This indicates a panel button. The symbol in the box indicates the symbol printed on the button.
1 2
This indicates the actual procedure for using the function.
n
This indicates supplementary explanations related to the function, examples of use, and hints.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
7
Finding the information that you need
Finding the information that you need
In order to find the information that you need, you can make use of the following pages.
Table of contents (page 9)
Locate the desired information within the flow of the entire manual.
Front and rear panels (page 11)
Here you can read about the name and location of each button and control, and read about their function.
Quickstart Guide (page20)
This brief, easy-to-follow section shows you how to use the basic features and functions of your new RM1x.
Function tree (page 32)
This lets you locate the desired information within the structure of the command hierarchy.
Glossary (page 146)
This section contains unfamiliar terms or phrases in alphabetical order with their explanations.
Index (page 150)
This lets you search alphabetically for unfamiliar terms to find pages on which they are discussed and pages on which
related topics appear.
8
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Table of Contents
SETUP
1. Front and rear panels .................................................................................................................................................................. 11
Front Panel .......................................................................................................................................................... 11
Rear Panel ........................................................................................................................................................... 14
Floppy disk drive ................................................................................................................................................ 15
2. Connections
Power supply connections .................................................................................................................................. 16
Audio equipment connections ............................................................................................................................ 17
Connecting a footswitch ..................................................................................................................................... 18
Connecting external MIDI devices ..................................................................................................................... 18
Connecting a MTR (multi-track recorder) .......................................................................................................... 19
3. Quickstart Guide ........................................................................................................................................................................ 20
4. Using the included disk .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
BASIC OPERATION ......................................................................................................................................................... 23
Chapter 1. BASIC CONCEPTS
1. Function tree ............................................................................................................................................................................... 32
2. How the RM1x is organized ....................................................................................................................................................... 34
3. Sequencer block ......................................................................................................................................................................... 35
4. Tone generator block .................................................................................................................................................................. 37
5. Controller block .......................................................................................................................................................................... 38
6. Effect block ................................................................................................................................................................................ 39
7. About floppy disks ...................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Chapter 2. PATTERN MODE
1. PATTERN Playback ................................................................................................................................................................... 46
2. Recording ................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
3. Groove ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 55
4. Play FX ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 57
5. MIDI delay ................................................................................................................................................................................. 60
6. Arpeggio ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 62
7. Voice ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 63
8. Voice Edit ................................................................................................................................................................................... 65
9. Effect .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 69
10. Setup ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 73
11. Disk .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 76
12. Job ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 80
13. Edit ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
14. Split ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 108
Chapter 3. PATTERN CHAIN MODE
1. Pattern Chain Playback ............................................................................................................................................................ 110
2. Disk .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 111
3. Job ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 112
Chapter 4. SONG MODE
1. SONG Playback ....................................................................................................................................................................... 116
2. Recording ................................................................................................................................................................................. 117
3. Groove ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 119
4. Play FX ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 119
5. MIDI delay ............................................................................................................................................................................... 119
6. Arpeggio ................................................................................................................................................................................... 119
7. Voice ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 120
8. Voice Edit ................................................................................................................................................................................. 120
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
9
Table of Contents
9. Effect ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 120
10. Setup ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 121
11. Disk ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 122
12. Job .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 123
13. Edit ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 128
14. Split (Song to Pattern) ............................................................................................................................................................ 129
Chapter 5. UTILITY MODE
1. System ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 132
2. MIDI Setup ............................................................................................................................................................................... 135
3. MIDI Filter ............................................................................................................................................................................... 137
Appendix
1. Specifications ........................................................................................................................................................................... 140
2. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................................................ 142
3. Error Messages ......................................................................................................................................................................... 144
4. Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................... 146
5. Index ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 150
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for
instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your
RM1x.
10
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
SETUP
SETUP
1. Front and rear panels
❏ Front Panel
2
3
16
7
1
4
11
6
12
5
10
13
9
17
16
18
9
8
15
14
19
1. BPM Display
Normally this 4-digit LED numeric display shows the current BPM (Beats Per Minute) value, right down to a tenth of a
beat. It can be switched to display measure numbers rather than beats per minute via a utility function (page 133). The BPM
display also shows values related to the real time Controller Knobs (page 12), but only while any of the knobs are operated.
2. MIDI Data Monitors
The MIDI IN and OUT indicators above the BPM display light whenever MIDI data is received via the rear-panel MIDI IN
connector (red MIDI IN indicator), or when MIDI data is transmitted by the RM1x via the MIDI OUT connector (green
MIDI OUT indicator).
3. LCD Display
The RM1x's large backlit LCD display panel displays the parameters and values related to the currently selected operation
or mode. The Display Knobs (page 12) and Function Buttons located immediately below the LCD display directly affect
the corresponding parameters or functions on the display. The [DISPLAY] and [CURSOR] buttons are also closely related
to display operation, and details are provided in the “Basic Operation” section beginning on page 23.
A CONTRAST control for the LCD display is provided on the rear panel (page 14). The LCD display can be set for normal
or inverse (white on black) display via a utility mode function (page 133).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
11
SETUP
4. Display Knobs
The four knobs located immediately below the LCD display directly control the corresponding parameters on the display.
For example, in the main PATTERN mode Display Knob 1 can be used to select a style, and Display Knob 4 can be used to
set the BPM. More details are provided in the “Basic Operation” section beginning on page 23.
5. Function Buttons and Indicators
The function buttons - [F1] through [F4] - are similar to the Display Knobs in that they directly control the corresponding
functions on the LCD display, but only when the related indicator is lit. More details are provided in the “Basic Operation”
section beginning on page 23.
6. VOLUME Control
Adjusts the volume of the RM1x audio output via the rear-panel OUTPUT and PHONES jacks.
7. Real Time Controller Knobs & [KNOB] Button
These knobs allow the corresponding parameters to be controlled in real time during pattern or song playback. The parameters listed on the panel below the knobs are the default pre-assigned parameters, but other parameters can be assigned as
required via the SETUP submode KNOB ASSIGN function (page 74). The knobs can be switched to control one of two
different parameter groups - “A” and “B” - via the [KNOB] button. The “A” parameter group (the upper default parameters
listed on the panel) are selected when the [KNOB] indicator is lit, and the “B” group (the lower parameters) is selected
when the [KNOB] indicator is out. Different parameters can be assigned to both the “A” and “B” groups via the KNOB
ASSIGN function mentioned above.
8. Cursor Buttons
The cursor buttons move the “cursor” around the LCD display screen, highlighting the various parameters that are available
for editing (the RM1x cursor appears as a dark block with inverse characters).
9. [NO -1] and [YES +1] Buttons
The [NO -1] and [YES +1] buttons are used to edit (change the value of) the parameter at which the cursor is currently
located. The [NO -1] button decrements (decreases stepwise) the value of the selected parameter, while the [YES +1]
button increments (increases stepwise) the parameter. Press either button briefly to decrement or increment the parameter
by one, or hold the button for continuous decrementing of incrementing in the specified direction.
The [NO -1] and [YES +1] button are also used to respond to certain prompts when they appear. Press [YES +1] to go ahead
with the operation, or [NO -1] to cancel.
10. DISPLAY [<-] and [->] Buttons
When the selected mode or submode (page 23) includes more parameters than can fit on the display at one time, arrow
symbols will appear at the left and/or right side of the display to indicate that more parameters are available in the indicated
direction(s). The DISPLAY [<-] and [->] buttons can be used to scroll the display in the corresponding direction when this
occurs.
11. MODE and SUBMODE Buttons
The four MODE buttons select the main RM1x operating modes (PATTERN, PATTERN CHAIN, SONG, and UTILITY),
while the SUBMODE buttons select a range of submodes via which you can access the RM1x's detailed programming
features. Details on mode and submode selection are provided in the “Basic Operation” section beginning on page 23.
12
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
SETUP
12. [EXIT] Button
The [EXIT] button takes you out of any function selected by the function buttons, or the edit or job modes (described
below), directly back to the current main mode (e.g. SONG or PATTERN).
13. Sequencer Buttons and Indicators
The sequencer buttons control recording and playback in the PATTERN, PATTERN CHAIN, and SONG modes.
REC
e
PLAY
p
STOP
s
r&f
t
Activates the record-ready mode in the RM1x PATTERN and SONG modes. The red REC
button indicator will light, then recording will begin as soon as the p button is pressed.
The e button can be pressed again to cancel the record-ready mode before recording
is actually started by pressing the p button.
Starts playback from the current point in the pattern or song if the record-ready mode is
not active, or recording from the same point if the record-ready mode is active. The green
PLAY indicator flashes at the current BPM during recording and playback.
Stops playback or recording.
Fast reverse and forward. Press the r or f button to rapidly move through the pattern
or song in the corresponding direction.
Top. Instantly returns to the first beginning of the current song or pattern (i.e. the first beat
of the first measure).
14. Keyboard
This 26-note keyboard makes it possible to program the RM1x without having to connect an external MIDI keyboard. It's
even polyphonic, so you can directly enter chords as well as single notes. The only thing it lacks is velocity sensitivity. The
RM1x does, however, accept velocity information from an external MIDI keyboard.
The keyboard also performs a range of functions as specified by the keyboard mode button (below): track selection,
transposition, numeric data entry, track mute/solo, and section selection. The “black keys” also perform a range of other
functions, such as selecting specific track ranges and memorizing a number of track mute setups.
15. Keyboard Mode Buttons
These buttons modify the function of the RM1x keyboard for track selection, transposition, numeric data entry, track mute/
solo, and section selection. Details are provided in the “Basic Operation” section beginning on page 23.
16. [OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] Buttons
Although the range of the RM1x keyboard is a little over two octaves, the [OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] buttons allow the
pitch of the keyboard to be shifted down or up in octave steps, over a range of 8 (+/- 4) octaves. Each time the [OCT
DOWN] button is pressed the pitch of the keyboard is shifted down by one octave, until the lower limit is reached. The
[OCT UP] button shifts the pitch of the keyboard up in the same way. The current amount of octave shift is indicated on the
LCD display.
17. [SHIFT] Button
The [SHIFT] button is used to access several secondary or “background” functions that you might only need in special
situations. For example, the [SHIFT] button can be used when you want to “solo” a track instead of muting it via the
[MUTE] keyboard mode button.
The [SHIFT] button can also be used in conjunction with the Display Knobs: hold the [SHIFT] button while rotating a knob
for faster data selection.
18. [ARPEGGIO ON] Button
Turns the RM1x's automatic arpeggio feature on or off (page 62). The [ARPEGGIO ON] button indicator will light when
the ARPEGGIO feature is on.
19. [TAP/ENTER] Button
This dual-purpose button is used both for tap-entry of BPM values (page 20), and to enter numeric values (page 26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
13
SETUP
❏ Rear Panel
4
3
7
5
6
2
1
1. STANDBY/ON Switch
Press in to turn the RM1x on, and press again to turn it off. When the power is on one of the mode button indicators will
light and the PATTERN mode display will appear on the LCD (Liquid Crystal Display).
2. DC IN Jack
The DC output cable from the Yamaha PA-5C AC Power Adaptor supplied with the RM1x is plugged in here.
3. CONTRAST Control
Use the CONTRAST control to achieve the best LCD display visibility (LCD visibility varies greatly with viewing angle).
4. MIDI IN & OUT Connectors
The RM1x has MIDI IN and MIDI OUT connectors for maximum system flexibility. If you plan to use a MIDI keyboard or
other instrument to play and program the RM1x, it should be connected to the RM1x MIDI IN connector (see “Connecting
external MIDI devices,” page 18). Input “filters” defining what data will and will not be received by the MIDI IN connector
can be set as required via the UTILITY mode (page 137).
The MIDI OUT connector can be connected to an external tone generator or synthesizer if you want to drive external voices
from the RM1x sequencer. Like the MIDI IN connector, MIDI filters can be set for the MIDI OUT connector via the
UTILITY mode.
5. L/MONO & R OUTPUT Jacks
These are the main stereo outputs from the RM1x tone generator system (see “Audio equipment connections,” page 17).
Both are standard 1/4” mono phone plugs. When a plug is inserted into only the L/MONO output, the left- and rightchannels signals are mixed and delivered via that output to allow direct connection to mono sound systems. The output level
is adjusted via the VOLUME control (page 12).
6. PHONES Jack
Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The
PHONES output level is adjusted via the VOLUME control.
7. FOOT SW Jack
An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch connected to this jack can be used for start/stop, section selection, sustain, or
tap BPM entry, as determined by the setting of the UTILITY mode FOOT SWITCH parameter (page 132).
14
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
SETUP
❏ Floppy disk drive
1. Floppy disk slot
This is where floppy disks are inserted for loading or saving data. 3.5 inch 2HD (MF2HD) or 2DD (MF2DD) floppy disks
can be used. (page 42)
2. Disk-in-use indicator
This indicator will light while data is being read from or written to the floppy disk. Never attempt to remove the disk while
this indicator is lit.
3. Eject button
Press this button to remove the floppy disk. Disks must be inserted or removed gently and firmly, and only while the access
indicator is dark.
2. Disk-in-use
indicator
3. Eject button
1. Floppy disk slot
n
The back of a floppy disk contains a write protect tab as shown in the following illustration. When this tab is in the downward
position (with the window open), it will not be possible to modify, add, or delete data. When you wish to protect important data, you
should leave the tab in this position.
Write permit
Write prohibit
Write protect tab
CAUTION !
Be aware that Yamaha can make no guarantee regarding data damage that results from improper use.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
15
SETUP
2. Connections
In order to use the RM1x, the included AC adaptor and an amp system etc. must be connected. If you use external MIDI
devices or controllers, these must also be connected.
This sections explains how to make these connections.
CAUTION!
Be sure to turn off the STANDBY/ON switch before making any connections. If you make connections while the STANDBY/ON
switch is on, you risk damaging external equipment such as the amp or speakers.
❏ Power supply connections
1 Make sure that the STANDBY/ON switch of the RM1x is set to STANDBY, and connect the included AC adaptor
(PA-5C) to the power supply jack.
Wrap the DC output cable of the adaptor around the cable clip (as shown below) to prevent accidental unplugging of the
cable during operation.
2 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet, and turn on the RM1x STANDBY/ON switch.
When turning the power off, simply reverse the procedure.
WARNING!
Use only the included PA-5C AC adaptor (or other adaptor specifically recommended by Yamaha). Using other AC adaptors
will cause malfunctions. Also, be sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the AC outlet if you will not be using the RM1x.
CAUTION!
Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you
are not using the RM1x for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor) during any RM1x record operation! Doing so can result in a loss
of data.
16
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
SETUP
❏ Audio equipment connections
To output the sound of the RM1x, connect an amp or mixer to the output jacks.
Connection to powered speakers
Connect two powered speakers (left and right) to the output jacks (L/MONO, R). If you are connecting only one powered
speaker, use the L/MONO jack.
VOL
Connection to a mixer
Connect the output jacks (L/MONO, R) to two channels of the mixer. The channel connected to the L/MONO jack should
be panned left, and the channel connected to the R jack should be panned right. Make the same type of connections if you
are connecting the RM1x to an MTR or cassette deck.
PHANTOM +48V
PHANTOM +48V
OFF ON
OFF ON
INPUT (BAL)
13
15
14
16
–10dBV (UNBAL)
L
R
IN
OUT
2TR
PHONES
PAD
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
–16
–60
+10 GAIN –34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
15/16
2TR IN
+10
GAIN
–20
13/14
+10
GAIN
MONITOR
2TR IN
–20
15/16
0
LEVEL
10
0
MONITOR
OUT
LEVEL
10
PHONES
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
EQ HIGH
UTILITY
MIDI
SETUP
VIEW
Ø/DELAY
PAN/
ROUTING
PAN
PAN
FUNCTION
DYNAMICS
EQ/ATT
MEMORY
LO-MID
G
FADER MODE
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O
AUX 1
AUX 2
REMOTE
AUX 3
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
HI-MID
F
F
G
1 RETURN 2
LOW
SELECTED CHANNEL
AUX 4
HOME
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13/14 15/16
17
SEL
18
SEL
19
SEL
20
SEL
21
SEL
22
SEL
23
SEL
24
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
ON
1 RETURN 2
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
–1/DEC
SOLO
MEMORY
+1/INC
PARAMETER
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
0
0
–10
–5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–15
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
–20
CURSOR
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
ENTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
9
10
11
12
13/14
15/16
STEREO
MASTER
Using headphones
If you are using headphones, connect them to the rear panel PHONES (headphones) jack.
When using headphones, adjust the volume to an appropriate level that will not harm your hearing.
CAUTION !
Do not connect the output jacks of the RM1x to the mic input jacks of an amp or cassette deck etc. If they are connected to mic
inputs, the sound quality may be impaired, and the device may be damaged. Also, when connecting the RM1x to a mixer or
similar device, set the mixer channels to the Line Input position.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
17
SETUP
❏ Connecting a footswitch
When using a separately sold FC4 or FC5 foot switch, insert the foot switch plug into the FOOT SW jack located on the rear
panel.
FC4 or FC5
❏ Connecting external MIDI devices
Connecting a MIDI keyboard
Realtime recording input will be easier if you use a MIDI keyboard.
Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT of the external MIDI keyboard to the MIDI IN connector on the rear panel.
MIDI
OUT
Connecting a tone generator module
RM1x song and pattern playback data can be used to play an external tone generator module.
Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector on the rear panel to the MIDI IN connector of the external MIDI
device.
MIDI IN
18
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
SETUP
❏ Connecting a MTR (multi-track recorder)
Since the RM1x implements MTC (MIDI Time Code) and MMC (MIDI Machine Control), you can produce music while
synchronized to a MTC- or MMC-compatible multi-track recorder.
Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the RM1x to the MIDI IN connector of the MTR, and the MIDI IN
connector of the RM1x to the MIDI OUT connector of the MTR.
If you use MTC or MMC to control an MTR, set the Utility mode MIDI page MIDI Sync setting to “MTC."
Synchronizing the RM1x by MTC from an external device
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MTR
(MTC,MMC-compatible)
Controlling an external device via MMC from the RM1x
MIDI OUT
MTR
(MTC,MMC-compatible)
MIDI IN
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
19
SETUP
3. Quickstart Guide
When your RM1x is properly connected and powered up, try the following to get a feel for how easy it is to remix the preset
patterns to create your own groove.
But remember, this is just the tip- of the iceberg! The RM1x can do much, much more.
1. Select a Style
4. Dial In a New BPM (Beat Per Minute)
Use Display Knob 1 to select a preset style (P01 … P60).
Use Display Knob 4 to adjust the BPM to a value that feels
right to you.
2. Start Playback
Press the PLAY p button. The currently selected section of
the selected style will begin playing. This “pattern” will continue to loop until a different section or style is selected.
5. Tap In a New BPM
Tap on the [TAP] button a few times at the desired BPM. The
RM1x will automatically adjust to the BPM you tap.
3. Switch Sections
Make sure that the [SECTION] button indicator is flashing (if
it isn’t, press the [SECTION] button so that it does), then use
the white keys on the RM1x keyboard to switch sections.
A newly selected section will begin immediately. The current section is indicated by a
flashing indicator above the corresponding key,
and a letter (“A” … “P”) next to “SEC” in the
display.
• More on section on page 28.
20
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
6. Transpose
Transpose the pattern to any key by pressing a key on the
RM1x keyboard while holding the [TRANSPOSE] button.
The central E key on the keyboard (labeled “H”
and “8”) corresponds to no transposition.
Higher or lower keys indicate transposition by
the corresponding number of semitones in the
corresponding direction. The amount of transposition is also indicated by the TRANS
parameter in the display.
• More on transposition on page 27.
SETUP
7. Use the Real-time Controller Knobs
Try rotating the RM1x controller knobs to hear their effect.
The default parameters are labeled below each knob. The
[KNOB] button selects the “A” or “B” parameter group.
When the mute mode is engaged the indicators above tracks which contain data will light.
Press a key once to mute a track which contains data (its indicator will flash and “M” will
appear above the tracks number in the display). Press the key again to un-mute a muted
track.
• More on the Mute and Solo functions on
page 28.
9. Play an Arpeggio
The knobs affect the currently selected track.
You can quickly select any of the 16 tracks by
pressing the appropriate white key on the
RM1x keyboard (“1” … “16”) while holding
the [TRACK] button. The number of the selected
track will be highlighted in the display.
Press the [ARPEGGIO] button so that its indicator lights, then
play an interval or chord on the RM1x keyboard. The RM1x
will automatically create an arpeggio based on the notes you
play.
• More on track selection on page 27.
The “A” parameter group (the upper default
parameters listed on the panel) are selected
when the [KNOB] indicator is lit, and the “B”
group (the lower parameters) is selected when
the [KNOB] indicator is out.
• More on the controller knobs on page 29.
8. Mute & Un-mute Tracks
Press the [MUTE] button so that its indicator flashes, then
use the white keys on the RM1x keyboard to mute and unmute tracks as required.
Using the Arpeggio submode parameters you
can select several different types of arpeggio.
• More on the Arpeggio mode on page 62.
10. Experiment With Different Styles
Use control knob 1 to select different styles and experiment
with the various sections each contains.
Press the STOP s button to stop playback
when done.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
21
SETUP
4. Using the included disk
Here's how to use the included disk.
❏ Contents of the disk
The included disk contains 3 demo songs.
4 Press the [DISK] button again.
You will enter Load page, and the top line of the display
will indicate “SONG DISK 2 Load”.
The demo songs allow you to enjoy demo playback, and to
playback songs while adjusting the assignable knobs (PLAY
FX and VOICE) to experience the possibilities of the RM1x.
❏ Listening to the demo playback
Here's how to load a demo song file from disk and enjoy the
demo playback.
1 With the label facing upward, insert the disk into the
floppy disk slot.
Insert the disk all the way until it clicks into place.
5 Use the CURSOR button to move the cursor to the
file you wish to play.
6 Press the F1 button (LOAD!) to start the load operation.
The display will indicate “Executing...".
7 Press the [SONG] button.
The top line of the display will indicate the loaded song
name.
8 Press the PLAY p button to start playback.
2 Press the [SONG] button.
You will enter Song mode.
3 Press the [DISK] button.
You will enter Disk submode.
22
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
9 Press the STOP s button to stop playback.
n
By changing the DISK FILE in step 5 you can playback other
songs.
Basic Operation
Basic Operation
1. Selecting Modes & Submodes
The RM1x has three main playback and recording modes — PATTERN, PATTERN CHAIN, and SONG — and a UTILITY
mode. Each of these includes a range of “submodes” which provide access to more in-depth parameters.
Note that a number of dots appears to the left of the MODE and SUBMODE buttons. The number of dots beside each button
indicates the number of display pages which can be accessed by that button. A button which has only one dot will access only
a single page. A button which has 3 dots, for example, will access three different display pages in sequence. You can go back
up through a sequence of pages from any page in the list by pressing the [EXIT] button the requisite number of times. The titles
of the pages accessed by all multi-page MODE and SUBMODE buttons are listed on the top panel to the right of the buttons
themselves. For example, looking at this list we can see that the SUBMODE [EFFECT] button, which has four dots, accesses
the “Type” “Variation Edit” “Chorus Edit” and “Reverb Edit” pages.
❏ The Main Modes
The main modes are directly accessed by pressing the corresponding MODE button: [PATTERN], [PATT CHAIN], [SONG],
or [UTILITY]. The corresponding indicator will light, and the name of the selected mode will appear in the upper left-hand
corner of the LCD Display. Here’s a brief summary of what the modes do, and page references to the related sections in this
manual.
Mode
PATTERN
PATTERN CHAIN
SONG
UTILITY
Description
This is the RM1x mode you’ll probably use for most recording and playback operations, and is the
default mode which will appear when the power is initially turned on. The [PATTERN] button alternately selects the main PATTERN mode and the PATCH mode in which phrases can be “patched”
together to create patterns.
In the RM1x the term “pattern” refers to a relatively short pattern - say, 4 to 16 measures - which is
used for looped playback.
The PATTERN CHAIN mode allows patterns to be “chained” together for automatic sequential
playback.
Although you’ll probably use the PATTERN mode for most recording and playback operations, the
RM1x SONG can be used to record and play complete songs when, for example, you want to
create a continuous sequence of more than 256 measures, or use an odd time signature.
As its name implies, the UTILITY mode provides access to a range of utility functions which affect
overall system and MIDI operation.
Page
45
109
115
131
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
23
Basic Operation
❏ The Submodes
The submodes are accessed via the SUBMODE buttons below the MODE buttons. When a SUBMODE button is pressed, the
submode corresponding to the currently selected main MODE is selected. For example, the PATTERN mode JOB submode
will be slightly different from the SONG mode JOB submode. The chart below includes brief summaries of what the submodes
do, and page references to the related sections in this manual.
Mode
GROOVE
PLAY FX
MIDI DELAY
ARPEGGIO
VOICE
VOICE EDIT
EFFECT
SETUP
DISK
JOB
EDIT
SPLIT
24
Description
This submode makes it possible to adjust the pitch, timing, length, and velocity of notes via a 16thnote grid to create “grooves” that would not be possible with precise sequencer-like programming.
A range of play effects which affect the sound only during playback, without actually changing the
sequence data. Play effects include harmonize, beat stretch, clock shift, gate time, and velocity
offset.
MIDI Delay creates delay effects that can sound much the same as those created by conventional
delay effect units, but the delays are created by manipulating the MIDI note data rather than the
audio signal.
This feature can be used to create simple automatic arpeggios based on notes played on the
RM1x keyboard.
The VOICE submode allows any of the RM1x’s voices to be assigned to individual tracks, and
includes volume, pan, and effect send controls for each track.
This submode provides access to in-depth voice editing parameters that you can use to customize
voices for your own sound.
Detailed effect editing to add the finishing touches to your sound.
The SETUP submode includes a LOW BOOST function, knob assignment for the RM1x’s realtime control knobs, and individual output channel assignments for the internal tone generator and
MIDI transmission.
All disk operations can be accessed via this submode: save, load, file name, delete, rename,
format, etc.
Accesses the RM1x’s extensive range of PATTERN, PATTERN CHAIN, and SONG jobs.
The EDIT submode allows detailed editing of sequence data, so you have complete control over
the pitch, timing, velocity, duration, and other parameters for each note.
The PATTERN SPLIT submode lets you copy specified measures from one section to another
section. The SONG SPLIT submode is similar, but it lets you copy specified measures from a song
to a specified section.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Page
55, 119
57, 119
60, 119
62, 119
63, 120
65, 120
69, 120
73, 121
76, 111, 122
80, 123
99, 128
108, 129
Basic Operation
2. Navigating Around the Display
In all of the RM1x displays, the currently selected parameter
or function is indicated by a “cursor” which can be either an
inverse block (i.e. the selected value will appear as white characters in a black block, or the opposite if the “NEGA” mode
is selected via the UTILITY mode LCD MODE function —
page 133), or an underline. The underline type cursor is often
used for parameters which are accessible via the display knobs
(see below). The cursor can be moved around the display via
the CURSOR buttons. Each of these four buttons moves the
cursor in the direction indicated by the corresponding arrow
(if the cursor can be moved in that direction). If you’re lost in
a display and can’t locate cursor, try pressing the CURSOR
buttons: you’ll spot the cursor as soon as it moves.
❏ Menu Selection
In JOB submodes (pages 80, 112, 123) you will be presented
with a “menu” from which you can select a job. There are
several ways to do this, as listed below:
CURSOR buttons
Display Knobs
[NO -1]/[YES +1] buttons
Cursor
Numeric Selection
Use the CURSOR buttons to scroll to
the desired job, then press the Select
function button (F4, below “Select ” on
the display.
Use the knob below “JOB” on the display to scroll through the job list, then
press the Select function button (F4,
below “Select ” on the display. You can
also use the CATEGORY knob to
switch between job categories (listed
to the left of the jobs).
Press the [NO -1] or [YES +1] once
briefly to single-step through the
menu in the corresponding direction,
or hold the button for continuous
scrolling. When the desired job has
been highlighted, press the Select
function button (F4, below “Select ” on
the display.
Use the numeric entry method described below to enter the number of
the desired job. The job number will
flash in the upper right corner of the
display. Then press the [ENTER] button.
Cursor
If a selected mode has more parameters than can fit in a single
display screen, an arrow will appear on one or both sides of
the display, indicating that more parameters are available by
scrolling in the corresponding direction(s). This can be accomplished either by moving the cursor past the end of the
display by using the CURSOR buttons, or the display can
scrolled directly by using the DISPLAY buttons.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
25
Basic Operation
3. Changing (Editing) Values
The RM1x lets you adjust and edit values in three ways:
❏ The Display Knobs
❏ Numeric Entry
The display knobs provide a fast, easy way to adjust and edit
corresponding parameters. If any parameters in the selected
display can be accessed via the display knobs, they will appear directly above the knobs as shown in the example below.
Numeric entry can be useful when you know precisely the
value you want to enter, making it unnecessary to scroll
through long lists of values or parameters to get the desired
effect.
For numeric entry the cursor must be located at the value to
be edited. Press and hold the [NUM] keyboard mode button
— the LEDs above the keys marked “1” through “9” and “0”
will light, indicating that those keys can be used to enter a
numeric value. While still holding the [NUM] button, press
the number keys to enter the value, starting from the leftmost
digit. To enter the value “104,” for example, press “1,” “0,”
and then “4.” When the desired value has been specified, release the [NUM] button. The value should be flashing on the
display as entered. Finally, press the [ENTER] button to actually enter the specified value.
To adjust a knob-related parameter, simply rotate the knob
either clockwise to increase the value or counter-clockwise to
decrease the value. For more rapid adjustment — when, for
example, you need to quickly cover a large value range —
rotate the appropriate display knob while holding the [SHIFT]
button.
The function of the display knobs does not depend on cursor
location, so you adjust the related values with the cursor located at another position on the display.
❏ The [NO -1] and [YES +1] Buttons
The [NO -1] and [YES +1] buttons offer a convenient, precise
way to increment or decrement the selected value in singlestep increments. After making sure that the cursor is located
at the value to be edited, press either the [NO -1] or [YES +1]
once briefly for a single step in the corresponding direction,
or hold the button for continuous scrolling.
Note that the [NO -1] and [YES +1] buttons are also used to
confirm or abort certain operations — thus the “NO” and
“YES” labels.
n
26
• For even faster decrementing or incrementing, press the
opposite increment/decrement button while holding the
button corresponding to the direction you want to increment/decrement in.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Basic Operation
4. The Function Buttons
The four function buttons below the LCD Display — F1
through F4 — only become active when necessary. When a
function button is active, its indicator (the LED immediately
to the left of the button) will light. The function buttons become active when a “go do it” type control is required. Disk
“SAVE,” for example. Or the “DO!” function provided for
most of the jobs.
(the corresponding indicator will flash and the selected track
will be highlighted on the LCD Display), then release the
[TRACK] button.
❏ TRANSPOSE
This mode provides a fast, easy way to transpose playback
pitch in semitone increments from -12 semitones to +13 semitones (used in conjunction with the OCTAVE buttons — page
13 — transposition is actually possible over a +/- 36 semitone
range). When the [TRANSPOSE] button is held, the keyboard
indicator(s) corresponding to the current transpose value will
flash. A single flashing LED indicates the corresponding white
key, and a pair of flashing LEDs indicates the black key between them.
5. Keyboard Modes
The RM1x keyboard does a lot more than simply enter notes.
In conjunction with the KEYBOARD mode buttons it allows
fast, efficient entry of a range of parameters. One of its alternative functions — numeric value entry — has already been
discussed in the “Changing (Editing) Values” section, (page
26). The keyboard is also used for grid-type data entry in the
Grid Groove (page 55) and Grid Step Record (page 54) modes.
The remaining keyboard modes are summarized below:
The central E key on the keyboard (labeled “H” and “8”) corresponds to no transposition. Higher or lower keys indicate
transposition by the corresponding number of semitones in
the corresponding direction. The amount of transposition is
also indicated by the TRANS parameter in the PATTERN and
SONG displays.
To change the transpose value, simply press the appropriate
key while holding the [TRANSPOSE] button.
❏ TRACK
❏ NUM
Allows direct track selection for recording and other trackdependent operations. To select one of the RM1x’s 16 tracks,
press and hold the [TRACK] button. The indicator above the
keyboard key corresponding to the currently selected track
will flash. While still holding the [TRACK] button, simply
press the key corresponding to the track you want to select
Described under “Numeric Entry” in the “Changing (Editing)
Values” section (page 26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
27
Basic Operation
❏ MUTE (SOLO)
This button can be used in conjunction with the keyboard to
mute or solo specific tracks. Tracks which are muted produce
no sound during playback. If a track is soloed, only that track
will be heard during playback.
To mute any number of tracks in the PATTERN or SONG
mode, press the KEYBOARD [MUTE] button. The [MUTE]
button indicator will flash. Next, press the keys corresponding to the tracks you want to mute — an “M” will appear
above the track numbers of muted tracks on the LCD Display.
Each time a key is pressed while the MUTE mode is engaged
the corresponding track will be alternately muted and unmuted. You can then disengage the MUTE mode by pressing
the [MUTE] button a second time (the [MUTE] button indicator will go out), and the current mute settings will remain in
effect. Five separate mute setups can be memorized for instant recall as described in the “Mute Memory” section, below.
While the [MUTE] button indicator is flashing it is also possible to mute all tracks simultaneously by pressing the black
key labeled [ALL]. In the same way tracks 1 through 8 can be
muted at once by pressing the [1-8] key. In this case the remaining tracks (9 through 16) will all be un-muted. The [916] key mutes tracks 9 through 16 while un-muting tracks 1
through 8. Pressing the next black key (C#) or the one next to
that (BPM) will un-mute all muted tracks.
Only a single un-muted track can be soloed at a time, and
unlike the mute settings, the solo function will be disengaged
when the MUTE mode is disengaged. To solo a track, press
the [MUTE] button while holding the [SHIFT] button. The
[MUTE] button indicator will flash at a faster rate than when
the MUTE mode is engaged, and the indicator above the currently soloed track will flash. Simply press a different key to
solo a different track, then press the [MUTE] button a second
time (the [MUTE] button indicator will go out) to disengage
the SOLO mode.
28
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Mute Memory
While the MUTE mode is engaged, the MUTE MEMORY
buttons (the highest 5 black keys) can be used in conjunction with the [SHIFT] button to memorize the current mute
setup: press a MUTE MEMORY button while holding the
[SHIFT] button. Up to 5 different mute setups can be
memorized in this way.
Memorized mute setups can be instantly recalled while
the MUTE mode is engaged simply by pressing the appropriate MUTE MEMORY button.
❏ SECTION
Styles in the RM1x PATTERN mode can have up to 16 “sections,” — “A” through “P.” Each section is effectively a separate pattern, and different sections can be used for introductions, variations, breaks, endings, etc. The SECTION mode
allows the keyboard to be used for direct section selection,
allowing you to quickly change sections during playback.
When the KEYBOARD [SECTION] button is pressed the
[SECTION] button indicator will flash, keyboard indicators
corresponding to sections which contain data will light, and
the keyboard indicator corresponding to the currently selected
section will flash. The current section is also shown by the
“SEC” parameter on the LCD Display. To select a different
section, simply press the appropriate key. Press the [SECTION]
button a second time to disengage the SECTION mode (the
[SECTION] button indicator will go out).
Basic Operation
6. The Realtime Controller Knobs
One of the features that makes the RM1x a great performance
tool is its realtime controller knobs. The knobs allow the corresponding parameters to be controlled in real time during
pattern or song playback, so, for example, you can sweep filter cutoff frequency, bend pitch, add or modify effects, or control just about any available parameter during playback simply by turning the appropriate knob. A complement of 8 controller knobs means you have instant access to multiple parameters, and you can control more than one parameter at the
same time.
The parameters listed on the panel below the knobs are the
default pre-assigned parameters, but other parameters can be
assigned as required via the SETUP submode Knob Assign
function (page 74). The knobs can be switched to control one
of two different parameter groups - “A” and “B” - via the
[KNOB] button. The “A” parameter group (the upper default
parameters listed on the panel) are selected when the [KNOB]
indicator is lit, and the “B” group (the lower parameters) is
selected when the [KNOB] indicator is out. Different parameters can be assigned to both the “A” and “B” groups via the
KNOB ASSIGN function mentioned above. The default “A”
and “B” group parameters are listed below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BEAT STRETCH
CLOCK SHIFT
GATE TIME
VELOCITY
CUTOFF
RESONANCE
EG DECAY
PITCH BEND
MIDI DELAY
OCTAVER
HARMONIZE 1
HARMONIZE 2
VARIATION
CHORUS
REVERB
TRACK VOLUME
n
• This procedure does the same thing as the Undo/Redo job
in the Pattern job (page 82), Pattern chain job (page 113),
and Song job (page 124).
8. Used Memory display
Here's how to check the amount of currently used memory, so
that you can see about how much more recording can be done.
Press the F1 button while holding the [SHIFT] button. The
“Used Memory” will appear as long as you continue holding
these buttons.
9. System Initialization
If you wish to reset the RM1x’s settings to the factory condition, you can perform the Initialization operation.
1 While holding down the [OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP]
buttons and the F#/Gb key [ALL] located at their right,
turn on the STANDBY/ON switch.
7. Undo/Redo
Undo is a function that cancels the last-executed recording,
edit, or job operation, and restores the data to its previous
condition. Redo is a function that cancels the Undo operation,
and re-executes the operation.
These jobs are very convenient when important data has been
damaged because of recording, editing, or a job. These jobs
can be used for recording, editing, and job (except Name) operations in the Pattern mode, Pattern chain mode, and the Song
mode, and for Patch operations in the Pattern mode.
To execute the Undo operation, press the [JOB] button while
holding the [SHIFT] button. To execute the Redo operation,
press the [JOB] button while holding the [SHIFT] button again.
After a recording, editing, or job operation has been performed,
it will always be possible to execute Undo. Likewise, it will
always be possible to execute Redo after Undo has been executed, and Undo and Redo will alternate.
2 When “RM1x” appears in the display, release the keys.
3 When initialization has been performed, “Factory Set”
appears briefly in the display.
CAUTION!
When initialization is performed, all internal memory will be
erased. If you wish to keep any of your data, you must save it
to floppy disk before initializing.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
29
Basic Operation
Simultaneous Button & Knob Functions
This chart lists a number of RM1x functions which are
accessed either by simultaneously pressing two buttons, or by
operating a knob while holding a button.
Buttons/knobs simultaneously operated
STOP
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
PLAY
MUTE
PATTERN
PATT CHAIN
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SONG
GROOVE
PLAY FX
MIDI DELAY
F1
MUTE MEMORY
SECTION[A] - [P]
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
Keyboard
Keyboard
Keyboard
Keyboard
Keyboard
SHIFT
Display Knob1 - 4
SHIFT
Knob 1 - 8
SHIFT
Knob 1 - 8
SHIFT
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
JOB
TRACK[1] - [16]
BPM
OCT DOWN
OCT UP
CURSOR buttons
ALL
TRACK
[1] - [8]
TRACK
[9] - [16]
TRANSPOSE
NUM
OCT UP
OCT UP
OCT DOWN
Keyboard
NUM [1]-[9], [0]
OCT DOWN
Keyboard
Keyboard
30
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Description
Specifies the current measure as the measure the RM1x will “jump” to
when the [STOP] button is pressed.
Starts loop playback of the currently selected song in the SONG mode.
Engages the SOLO mode.
Resets parameter changes applied by the Knobs in the PATTERN mode.
Resets parameter changes applied by the Knobs in the PATT CHAIN
mode.
Resets parameter changes applied by the Knobs in the SONG mode.
Resets the GROOVE parameters of the selected track.
Resets the PLAY FX parameters of the selected track.
Resets the MIDI DELAY parameters of the selected track.
Displays the amount of memory currently in use.
Stores the MUTE MEMORY setting.
Simultaneously hold the [SHIFT] button and the desired section button to
auto-retrigger section change according to the Pattern Quantize value
(page 132).
Adds the specified note during arpeggio playback.
Deletes the specified note during PATTERN Realtime Recording.
Deletes the specified note during Step Recording.
Selects the specified note during Grid Step Recording.
Selects a single note position and deselect all others in the GRID
GROOVE submode.
Rotate the appropriate Display Knob while holding the [SHIFT] button for
coarser, more rapid adjustment.
Allows the knob position to be changed without changing the effect
parameter.
Deletes all corresponding parameter data during PATTERN realtime
recording.
Executes the Undo/Redo operation.
Selects the specified track.
Selects the BPM track in the SONG mode.
Moves the cursor to successively lower track numbers.
Moves the cursor to successively higher track numbers.
Moves the cursor to tracks in the corresponding directions.
While holding the [TRACK] and [ALL] buttons simultaneously, the effect
of the Knobs will be applied to all tracks.
While holding the [TRACK] and [1~8] buttons simultaneously, the effect
of the Knobs will be applied to tracks 1~8.
While holding the [TRACK] and [9~16] buttons simultaneously, the effect
of the Knobs will be applied to tracks 9~16.
Changes the transpose value.
Enters the specified number.
Resets the keyboard octave.
Applies a maximum vibrato effect to the note.
Bends the note up to the maximum pitch allowed by the currently
specified pitch bend range.
See page
46
116
28
29
29
29
55, 119
57, 119
60, 119
29
28
28, 132
21, 62, 119
51
52, 118
53, 118
55, 119
26
29
51
29
27
116
25
25
25
29
29
29
27
26
13
13
13
BASIC CONCEPT
Chapter 1. BASIC CONCEPTS
This chapter explains the basic concepts that you need to know before
use, such as the mode structure and the internal structure of the RM1x.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Function tree .............................................. 32
How the RM1x is organized ........................ 34
Sequencer block ........................................ 35
Tone generator block .................................. 37
Controller block ......................................... 38
Effect block ................................................ 39
About floppy disks ..................................... 42
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
31
1. Function tree
BASIC CONCEPT
1. Function tree
❏ PATTERN MODE
PATTERN Playback, Patch ................................................. page 46
e Recording ........................................................... page 49
Realtime Recording ......................................... page 51
Step Recording ................................................ page 52
Step Recording (Grid) ..................................... page 54
GROOVE ................................................................... page 55
PLAY FX ................................................................... page 57
Harmonize ....................................................... page 57
Play FX ............................................................ page 58
MIDI DELAY ............................................................ page 60
Delay ............................................................... page 60
Feedback .......................................................... page 61
ARPEGGIO ............................................................... page 62
Arpeggio Setting .............................................. page 62
VOICE ....................................................................... page 63
Voice Balance .................................................. page 63
Effect Send ...................................................... page 64
VOICE EDIT ............................................................. page 65
EG .................................................................... page 65
Pitch Bend/Portamento .................................... page 66
LFO ................................................................. page 67
Filter ................................................................ page 68
EFFECT ..................................................................... page 69
Type ................................................................. page 69
Variation edit ................................................... page 70
Chorus edit ...................................................... page 71
Reverb edit ....................................................... page 71
SETUP ....................................................................... page 73
Low Boost ....................................................... page 73
Knob Assign .................................................... page 74
Out Channel ..................................................... page 75
DISK .......................................................................... page 76
Save ................................................................. page 76
Load ................................................................. page 77
Rename ............................................................ page 78
Delete/Format/Information .............................. page 79
JOB ............................................................................ page 80
Job List ............................................................ page 80
Undo/Redo
Job00 Undo/Redo ....................... page 82
Note
Job01 Quantize ........................... page 82
Job02 Modify Velocity ............... page 84
Job03 Modify Gate Time ........... page 85
Job04 Crescendo ........................ page 86
Job05 Transpose ......................... page 87
Job06 Glide ................................ page 87
Job07 Create Roll ....................... page 88
Job08 Chord sort ........................ page 88
Job09 Chord Separate ................ page 89
Event
Job10 Shift Clock ....................... page 89
Job11 Copy Event ...................... page 89
Job12 Erase Event ...................... page 90
32
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Job13 Extract Event ................... page 90
Job14 Create Continuous Data ... page 91
Job15 Thin Out ........................... page 91
Job16 Modify Control Data ....... page 92
Job17 Time Stretch ..................... page 92
Phrase
Job18 Copy Phrase ..................... page 92
Job19 Exchange Phrase .............. page 93
Job20 Mix Phrase ....................... page 93
Job21 Append Phrase ................. page 93
Job22 Split Phrase ...................... page 94
Job23 Get Phrase ........................ page 94
Job24 Put Phrase ........................ page 95
Job25 Clear Phrase ..................... page 95
Job26 Phrase Name .................... page 95
Track
Job27 Copy Track ...................... page 95
Job28 Exchange Track ............... page 96
Job29 Clear Track ...................... page 96
Job30 Normalize Play Effect ...... page 96
Job31 Divide Drum Track .......... page 97
Pattern
Job32 Copy Pattern .................... page 97
Job33 Append Pattern ................ page 97
Job34 Split Pattern ..................... page 98
Job35 Clear Pattern .................... page 98
Job36 Style Name ...................... page 98
EDIT .......................................................................... page 99
Edit .................................................................. page 99
View Filter ..................................................... page 107
SPLIT ...................................................................... page 108
Split ............................................................... page 108
❏ PATTERN CHAIN MODE
PATTERN CHAIN Playback ............................................. page 110
DISK ........................................................................ page 111
Save ............................................................... page 111
Load ............................................................... page 111
Rename .......................................................... page 111
Delete/Format/Infomation ............................. page 111
JOB .......................................................................... page 112
Job List .......................................................... page 112
Undo/Redo
Job00 Undo/Redo ..................... page 113
Event
Job01 Copy Event .................... page 113
Job02 Erase Event .................... page 113
Measure
Job03 Create Measure .............. page 113
Job04 Delete Measure .............. page 113
Convert
Job05 Convert to Song ............. page 114
Chain
Job06 Copy Chain .................... page 114
Job07 Clear Chain .................... page 114
Job08 Chain Name ................... page 114
1. Function tree
SONG Playback ................................................................ page 116
e Recording ......................................................... page 117
Realtime Recording ....................................... page 118
Step Recording .............................................. page 118
Step Recording (Grid) ................................... page 118
GROOVE ................................................................. page 119
Grid Groove ................................................... page 119
PLAY FX ................................................................. page 119
Harmonize ..................................................... page 119
Play Fx ........................................................... page 119
MIDI DELAY .......................................................... page 119
Delay ............................................................. page 119
Feedback ........................................................ page 119
ARPEGGIO ............................................................. page 119
Arpeggio Setting ............................................ page 119
VOICE ..................................................................... page 120
Voice Balance ................................................ page 120
Effect Send .................................................... page 120
VOICE EDIT ........................................................... page 120
EG .................................................................. page 120
Pitch Bend/Portamento .................................. page 120
LFO ............................................................... page 120
Filter .............................................................. page 120
EFFECT ................................................................... page 120
Type ............................................................... page 120
Variation edit ................................................. page 121
Chorus edit .................................................... page 121
Reverb edit ..................................................... page 121
SETUP ..................................................................... page 121
Low Boost ..................................................... page 121
Knob Assign .................................................. page 121
Out Channel ................................................... page 121
DISK ........................................................................ page 122
Save ............................................................... page 122
Load ............................................................... page 122
Rename .......................................................... page 122
Delete/Format/Information ............................ page 122
JOB .......................................................................... page 123
Job List .......................................................... page 123
Undo/Redo
Job00 Undo/Redo ..................... page 124
Note
Job01 Quantize ......................... page 124
Job02 Modify Velocity ............. page 124
Job03 Modify Gate Time ......... page 124
Job04 Crescendo ...................... page 125
Job05 Transpose ....................... page 125
Job06 Glide .............................. page 125
Job07 Create Roll ..................... page 125
Job08 Chord Sort ...................... page 125
Job09 Chord Separate .............. page 125
Event
Job10 Shift Clock ..................... page 125
Job11 Copy Event .................... page 125
Job12 Erase Event .................... page 126
Job13 Extract Event ................. page 126
Job14 Create Continuous Data .. page 126
Job15 Thin Out ......................... page 126
Job16 Modify Control Data ..... page 126
Job17 Time Stretch ................... page 126
Measure
Job18 Create Measure .............. page 126
Job19 Delete Measure .............. page 126
Track
Job20 Copy Track ..................... page 127
Job21 Exchange Track ............. page 127
Job22 Mix Track ...................... page 127
Job23 Clear Track .................... page 127
Job24 Normalize play Effect .... page 127
Job25 Divide Drum Track ........ page 128
Song
Job26 Copy Song ..................... page 128
Job27 Append Song .................. page 128
Job28 Song Name .................... page 128
EDIT ........................................................................ page 128
Edit ................................................................ page 128
View Filter ..................................................... page 128
SPLIT (Song to Pattern) .......................................... page 129
Split ............................................................... page 129
❏ UTILITY MODE
System ......................................................................... page 132
Master tune ........................................................ page 132
Footswitch ......................................................... page 132
Pattern Quantize ................................................ page 132
Memory Protect on/off ...................................... page 132
Click mode ........................................................ page 133
Click beat .......................................................... page 133
Recording count ................................................ page 133
LED display ...................................................... page 133
Event chase ........................................................ page 133
System exclusive ............................................... page 133
Edit view ........................................................... page 133
LCD mode ......................................................... page 133
MIDI Setup .................................................................. page 135
MIDI sync ......................................................... page 135
MTC Start offset ............................................... page 135
MIDI control ..................................................... page 135
Echo back .......................................................... page 135
TG param out .................................................... page 136
Voice setup to TG .............................................. page 136
Voice setup to MIDI .......................................... page 136
MIDI Filter .................................................................. page 137
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
33
BASIC CONCEPT
SONG MODE
2. How the RM1x is organized
BASIC CONCEPT
2. How the RM1x is organized
❏ Five blocks
The RM1x consists of five blocks: the sequencer block, the tone generator block, the controller block, the effect block, and the
arpeggio block.
Sequencer block (page 35)
Tone generator block (page 37)
Controller block (page 38)
Effect block (page 39)
Arpeggio block (page 62)
❏ How the blocks are connected
The five blocks are connected as follows.
External MIDI device,
MIDI tone generator
External MIDI device,
MIDI keyboard
Sequencer block
MIDI IN
Pattern
Phrase
Pattern
chain
Song
Tone Generator
block
Effect block
MIDI OUT
MIDI
messages
Audio
signals
Audio
signals
Arpeggio block
MIDI messages
Controller
block
34
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
3. Sequencer block
❏ About the sequencer block
This block lets you create patterns and songs by recording/
editing musical performances recorded from an external MIDI
device or from the controller block, and then plays back this
data, transmitting it to the tone generator block or to an external MIDI tone generator as MIDI messages.
The sequencer block can be operated in three modes: Pattern
mode (page 45), Pattern Chain mode (page 109), and Song
mode (page 115).
By recording one track at a time to create a multi-track recording, you can create patterns and songs which use up to 16
tracks.
When patterns or songs are played back, the musical data is
output to the tone generator block and to the MIDI OUT connector. The output destination of the musical data can be specified for each track by setting the Out Channel (pages 75, 121).
“Tracks” are memory areas in which musical performances
are recorded. Musical data can be recorded, edited, and played
back independently for each track.
❏ Pattern
In the RM1x the term “pattern” refers to a relatively short
pattern — say, 4 to 16 measures — which is used for looped
playback.
Section
“Sections” are the individual components that make up a
“style” (above). Each section plays a single “pattern”
(above).
For each style, the RM1x provides 16 sections (A - P).
Phrase
“Phrases” are musical phrases for a single instrument, such
as a rhythm pattern for the rhythm part, a bass line for the
bass part, or a chord backing for the guitar part. Phrases
are the smallest unit that makes up the pattern.
Preset phrases and user phrases are categorized by two
parameters: “phrase category” and “ phrase number.” This
lets you efficiently find desired phrases without having to
be familiar with each individual phrase.
• Phrase category
Phrase category refers to the type of instrument or playing
technique. “US” indicates a “User Phrase,” and all others
are preset phrases.
• Phrase Number
Phrase Number specifies phrases within Phrase Category
by a number 001 - 256. (User phrases are numbered 001 256.)
Styles (Preset x 60, User x 50)
A
B
P
C
16 sections
Patterns are created by joining up to 16 parts vertically with
drums, bass, and chord backing. While phrases contain musical data for a single instrument, patterns combine two or more
phrases to create a single backing pattern.
Patterns are created in the Pattern mode. (page 45)
The RM1x manages patterns by Style, by Section and by
phrase.
Track
1
2
3
4
Phrase
Phrase
Phrase
Phrase
16
Phrase
The RM1x provides 60 x 16 = 960 patterns.
Style
“Styles” are groups of 16 patterns or “sections” (see “Section,” below) which can be selected at any time and in any
order during playback in the RM1x PATTERN mode. One
section might be the style’s introduction, another the verse,
another the bridge, etc.
The RM1x provides 60 preset styles.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
35
BASIC CONCEPT
3. Sequencer block
3. Sequencer block
BASIC CONCEPT
Playback channel of each track
When a pattern is played back, the musical data of each
track in the pattern is transmitted to the tone generator
block and the MIDI OUT connector according to the Out
Channel settings of SETUP submode. (page 75)
The data is transmitted to the tone generator block as specified by the “TO TG” setting, and to the MIDI OUT connector as specified by the “MIDI OUT “ settings.
❏ Songs
“Songs” are songs that have been created by recording musical data to tracks in the Song mode.
The RM1x’s song memory can hold 20 songs.
Track structure of a song
Each song consists of 16 sequence tracks and one BPM
(tempo) track.
Sequencer block (Pattern)
The sequence tracks are used to record musical data. Data
can be recorded from the controller block etc. using
realtime recording or step recording etc. The RM1x has
16 sequence tracks, and each track can record musical data
for one Part.
Sequence tracks
TR 1
Phrase
TR 2
Phrase
TR 3
Phrase
TR 16
Phrase
MIDI
OUT
TO TG
Part 1
MIDI OUT
Part 2
Sequence track playback channels
When a song is played back, the musical data of each sequence track is transmitted to the tone generator block and
the MIDI OUT connector according to the Out Channel
settings of SETUP submode. (page 75)
Part 3
Part 16
Tone generator
block
The data is transmitted to the tone generator block as specified by the Out Channel “TO TG” setting, and to the MIDI
OUT connector on the channels specified by the “MIDI
OUT ”settings.
Sequencer block (Song)
Sequence tracks
Pattern chain
A Pattern Chain is a sequence of patterns programmed in
the PATTERN CHAIN mode.
The patterns in the Pattern Chain will play in the specified
sequence, and playback can be started from any measure
in the chain.
A Pattern Chain can include patterns from any of the
RM1x’s preset or user styles.
The RM1x has memory for 20 Pattern Chains.
TR 1
musical data
TR 2
musical data
TR 3
musical data
TR 16
musical data
MIDI
OUT
TO TG
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Part 16
Tone generator
block
36
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
MIDI OUT
4. Tone generator block
❏ About the tone generator block
The tone generator block is what actually produces sound in
response to the MIDI messages received from the sequencer
block, the controller block, and from the MIDI IN connector.
This is a 16part 32note polyphonic multi-timbral tone generator.
❏ Voices
“Voices” are the individual sound programs that you can edit,
which are used by the tone generator to produce sound.
There are two types of voices: normal voices which change
their pitch as you play different notes on the keyboard, and
drum voices which produce a different rhythm instrument
sound for each note of the keyboard.
Normal voices consist of 1 or 2 “elements.” By using two
elements you can produce a richer sound, or create a voice
that produces different sounds depending on the pitch or velocity.
Drum voices are special voices in which different sounds are
assigned to each note. You can make detailed modifications
to the sound of each note.
Elements are the building blocks that each voice is made of,
and are made from sampled waveforms. You can make detailed modifications to the pitch, tone and volume.
❏ Bank number (MSB, LSB) and
Program number (Voice number)
The RM1x contains 654 normal voices and 46 drum kits. This
is more voices than can be selected by a program number of 1
- 128. Thus, voices are selected on the RM1x using a combination of the Bank Number MSB, Bank Number LSB and
Program Number. When using MIDI to select a voice, transmit these three MIDI messages in the order of Bank Select
MSB, Bank Select LSB, and Program Change.
Bank Number
MSB=000 : LSB=000
MSB=063 : LSB=000
MSB=063 : LSB=001
MSB=063 : LSB=002
MSB=063 : LSB=003
MSB=063 : LSB=004
MSB=063 : LSB=005
MSB=063 : LSB=006
MSB=126 : LSB=000
MSB=127 : LSB=000
Normal voices: GM System Level 1
Normal voices: SyBa&Ld
Normal voices: SyPd&Fx
Normal voices: SyMater1
Normal voices: Band Instrument
Normal voices: Cls & Wind
Normal voices: Ethnic & Percussion
Normal voices: SFX
Drum Kit
GM Drum
❏ Maximum polyphony
The tone generator block has a maximum polyphony of 32
notes, in element units. i.e., 32 notes can be played simultaneously if you are using normal voices that consist of one element or drum voices, and 16 notes can be played simultaneously with normal voices that consist of two elements.
The number of elements used by each voice is given in the
voice lists of the separate “List Book”.
If MIDI messages are received which request more than the
available maximum polyphony, currently-sounding notes will
be turned off, and the later arrivals will be played. This type
of note assignment is called “last-note priority”.
❏ Connections between the
sequencer block and the tone
generator block
The sequencer block is internally connected to the tone generator block via MIDI.
The connections between each track of the sequencer block
and each part of the tone generator block can be specified by
the SETUP submode Out Channel (page 75) setting “TO TG”.
TO TG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Tone Generator
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
part number
The voices within the bank specified by the Bank Select messages are selected by Program Change messages.
Each voice is placed in a three-dimensional space with the
three axes being the Bank Select MSB, LSB, and Program
Change (see diagram below).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
37
BASIC CONCEPT
4. Tone generator block
5. The tone generator block
BASIC CONCEPT
5. Controller block
❏ About the controller block
The controller block lets you use the keyboard, assignable
knobs, and foot switch etc. to play music and control the tone
generator block via the sequencer block, or to directly control
the tone generator block or effect block.
The functions of the assignable knobs can be set in SETUP
submode (page 74).
The functions of the foot switch can be set in Utility mode
(page 132).
The output destination of the musical data transmitted from
the controller block is specified by the Keyboard Track setting (page 27). The musical data is output as specified by the
Out Channel setting of the keyboard track, either to one of the
parts of the tone generator or to the MIDI OUT connector.
❏ Relationship to other blocks
In Pattern mode, Pattern Chain mode and Song mode, the controller block is connected to the various parts of the tone generator and to the MIDI OUT connector via the keyboard track
(recording track) of the sequencer block.
Data from the controller block passes from the keyboard track
to the parts of the tone generator block and to external MIDI
devices in accordance with the Out Channel settings “TO TG,”
and “MIDI OUT.”
From the controller block, you can record user phrases or song
tracks, or play the tone generator block or external MIDI devices.
n
• The “keyboard track” is the track which is highlighted in
the Pattern Play and Song Play pages.
• The “recording track” is the track which is highlighted in
the Recording Standby pages.
38
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
6. Effect block
❏ About the effect block
This block processes the audio signal that is output from the
tone generator block, adding reverberation or ambiance etc.
The RM1x has three types of effect: the reverb effect, the chorus effect, and the variation effect.
Settings for this block can be made in Effect submode (pages
69, 120).
Effect settings for Pattern / Song mode can be made in Effect
submode and in Voice submode. In Effect submode, you can
store the effect type and other detailed settings of the three
effects for each song, allowing you to create the ideal acoustical ambiance for the style / song. In Voice submode, you can
store the effect send level settings of the three effects for each
part of the style / song.
System Effects and Insertion Effects
The effects of the effect block are divided into two types
of effect: system effects and insertion effects.
On the RM1x, the reverb effect and the chorus effect are
system effects, and the variation effect can be set either as
a system effect or an insertion effect.
In the case of a system effect, effect processing is performed by using the mixer Send and Return controls to
send signals from each tone generator Part to the effect
and then return the processed signal to the mixer.
In the case of an insertion effect, the effect is connected in
series between the instrument and the mixer, and adjusted
using the Dry/Wet Balance. On the RM1x, an insertion
effect can be used on any one specified Part.
Reverb effect
The reverb effect is dedicated to reverb. It adds reverberation to the sound.
In Effect submode, you can select one of 11 Effect Types,
and modify parameter values to adjust the character of the
reverb. Effect submode settings are remembered independently for each style / song.
Chorus effect
The chorus effect is dedicated to chorus. It adds spaciousness and depth to the sound.
In Effect submode, you can select one of 11 Effect Types,
and modify parameter values to adjust the character of the
chorus. Effect submode settings are remembered independently for each style / song.
Variation effect
The variation effect provides 43 types of effect including
reverb and chorus, and also distortion and overdrive etc.
In Effect submode, you can select one of 43 Effect Types,
and modify parameter values to adjust the character of the
effect. Effect submode settings are remembered independently for each style / song.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
39
BASIC CONCEPT
6. Effect block
6. Effect block
❏ How the effects work
BASIC CONCEPT
• Variation = Insertion
When Variation connection is set to Insertion, the three
effects will be connected as shown in the diagram below.
thick line indicates a stereo signal
Variation can be used only by one part
variation part
dry
VAR
volume
expression
part 1
reverb
pan
rev send
PAN
cho send
variation on/off
REVERB
reverb
return
PAN
dry
VAR
volume
expression
part 2
rev send
PAN
variation on/off
cho send
send chorus to reverb
dry
VAR
part 3
volume
expression
rev send
PAN
cho send
variation on/off
CHORUS
PAN
chorus
pan
chorus
return
OUTPUT
dry
VAR
volume
expression
part 16
rev send
PAN
cho send
variation on/off
DRY LINE
(pages 69, 120)
(pages 64, 120)
Of the 16 parts of the tone generator block, the signals of the
part specified by the Voice submode Variation on/off (pages
64, 120) will be input to the variation effect, and the variation
effect will be applied here.
The stereo location of the effect output is determined by the
Effect submode settings Reverb Pan (pages 72, 121) and Chorus Pan (pages 71, 121).
The signals of all tone generator parts including the abovementioned part will be sent to the reverb effect and the chorus
effect according to the Voice submode settings Reverb Send
Level (pages 64, 120) and Chorus Send Level (pages 64, 120).
Here you can adjust the depth of the effect for each part.
40
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
A bus line called Send Chorus To Reverb (pages 71, 121) connects the chorus effect to the reverb effect. By using this bus
line you can connect the chorus effect and reverb effect in
series.
• Variation = System
When Variation connection is set to System, the three effects will be connected as shown in the diagram below.
BASIC CONCEPT
6. Effect block
thick line indicates a stereo signal
dry level
volume
expression
part 1
rev send
PAN
REVERB
cho send
PAN
var send
reverb
pan
reverb
return
dry level
volume
expression
part 2
send chorus to reverb
rev send
PAN
cho send
var send
dry level
volume
expression
part 3
PAN
CHORUS
rev send
PAN
cho send
chorus
pan
var send
chorus
return
OUTPUT
send variation to chorus
send variation to reverb
dry level
volume
part 16
expression
VARIATION
rev send
PAN
cho send
PAN
var send
variation
pan
variation
return
DRY LINE
(pages 69, 120)
The signals from all tone generator parts will be sent to
the reverb effect, chorus effect, and variation effect according to the Voice submode settings Reverb Send Level
(pages 64, 120), Chorus Send Level (pages 64, 120), and
Variation Send Level (pages 64, 120). Here you can adjust
the effect depth for each part.
The stereo location of the effect output is determined by
the Effect submode settings Reverb Pan (pages 72, 121),
Chorus Pan (pages 71, 121), and Variation Pan (pages 70,
121).
(pages 64, 120)
If Variation connection = System, three bus lines will be
connected. Send Chorus To Reverb (pages 71, 121) is a
bus line that connects the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect. Send Variation To Chorus (pages 70, 121) is a bus
line that connects the Variation Effect to the Chorus Effect. Send Variation To Reverb (pages 70, 121) is a bus
line that connects the Variation Effect to the Reverb Effect. By using these three bus lines, you can use the effects
in a variety of ways, such as connecting the three effects
in series, or dividing them.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
41
7. About floppy disks
BASIC CONCEPT
7. About floppy disks
On the RM1x, floppy disks are used to save data that you
create, or to exchange data with other devices. This section
explains the types of floppy disks that the RM1x can use, and
things you should know about floppy disk handling.
❏ Removing a floppy disk
After making sure that the floppy disk drive is not in use,
firmly press the eject button, make sure that the floppy disk
has been completely ejected, and remove it from the drive.
❏ Types of floppy disk
The RM1x can use two types of floppy disk: 3.5 inch 2HD
and 3.5 inch 2DD.
Before data files can be stored on a floppy disk, the disk must
be formatted (initialized) (page 79).
The RM1x formats 2HD disks to 1.44 MB (megabytes) and
2DD disks to 720 KB (kilobytes) MS-DOS format. (MS-DOS
is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.)
Since this format is common to computers as well as to Yamaha
products and the products of other manufacturers, it allows
disk compatibility.
Press the eject button firmly and accurately,
and make sure that the disk is ejected
If the disk catches inside and does not slide out smoothly,
firmly press the eject button once again, or re-insert the floppy
disk and then press the eject button once again.
While the disk-in-use indicator is lit, data is being transferred
between the floppy disk and the RM1x. While the disk-in-use
indicator is lit, never turn off the power or attempt to remove
the floppy disk.
Doing so could damage not only the floppy disk but also the
floppy disk drive.
❏ Regular cleaning of the disk
drive heads
3.5 inch 2HD
1.44 MB
3.5 inch 2DD
720 KB
❏ Inserting a floppy disk
With the label side of the floppy disk facing upward, insert it
into the floppy disk drive starting with the end with the shutter.
Push the disk gently in until it clicks into place.
Floppy disk drives contain a high-precision magnetic head.
When a floppy disk drive is used for an extended period, the
heads will become soiled by magnetic particles from the floppy
disk. This will increase the chance of errors occurring when
data is read or written.
In order to keep the floppy disk drive in good condition, we
recommend that you clean the heads regularly (once a month).
❏ Floppy disk handling and storage
Floppy disks should not be placed in locations of direct sunlight or temperature extremes, or in excessively damp or dusty
locations.
Do not allow floppy disks to come near objects that have a
strong magnetic field, such as televisions or speakers.
Before turning off the power, remove the floppy disk from
the disk drive. Leaving a floppy disk in the drive for a long
period with the power turned off can cause the disk to become
dirty, producing read/write errors.
Push disk gently in until it clicks into place
42
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
❏ Preventing accidental erasure
Floppy disks have a write-protect slide which can be used to
prevent accidental erasure of data. On floppy disks which contain important data, move the write-protect slide to the writeprotect position (the window open) so that data cannot be
written to the disk.
write permit
write prohibit
write-protect slide
❏ Data backup
The data on a floppy disk can be damaged by unforeseen accidents. If you have especially important data that you wish to
keep, we suggest that you take the time to make a backup
copy.
❏ Types of file used by the RM1x
All data
These files handle all data of the RM1x’s internal memory
as a single file.
All data includes the following data.
Songs
20
Styles (User)
50
System Setup
1
Song data includes the musical data for songs 01 - 20 of
Song mode, the Voice submode and Effect submode settings for each song, and the Song mode Play FX and Out
Channel settings.
Style data includes data for the eight Patterns of each Style
(50 ✕ 16 = 800), and 99 User Phrases for each Style (50
✕ 99 = 4950). The data for each Pattern includes Play Effect, Pattern Voice, and Pattern Effect settings in addition
to the musical data.
System Setup contains the settings of Utility mode.
Style (User)
Style files contain all the data included in a style (16 sections and 256 user phrases) of Pattern mode.
Style files include the following data.
Musical data recorded in the Style
Play FX settings
Out Channel settings
Voice submode settings
Effect submode settings
Song
Song files contain all the data included in one song of Song mode.
Song files include the following data.
Musical data recorded in the song
Play FX settings
Out Channel settings
Voice submode settings
Effect submode settings
SMF
SMF (Standard MIDI File) is defined as a suggested format
for MIDI musical data, and is a sequencer data format used
by many musical instrument manufacturers and computer
software companies. Devices that are Standard MIDI File
compatible can exchange sequence data via floppy disk, etc.
SMF handles one Song or one Section (style) as a single
file. Play FX, Out Channel, Voice submode and Effect
submode settings are not included in an SMF file.
SMF+TG Header
When saving a pattern / song in this format, 1 or 2 setup
measures will be added to the beginning of the musical
data. Program Change, Volume, Pan, Reverb Send Level,
Chorus Send Level, Variation Send Level, and Pitch Bend
Sensitivity will be inserted in the form of MIDI data into
these setup measures.
When a file saved with a TG header is loaded and then
saved once again with the TG Header setting, tone generator setup data will again be inserted at the beginning of
the pattern / song, resulting in duplicate data. For this reason, before saving the data for the second time, you should
use the Pattern / Song job Delete Measure to delete the
previous setup measures that were added.
When a file saved with a TG header is loaded and played
back, the tempo may lag slightly during measure 1. However this will have no effect on the playback of the original portion of the song data.
When a file saved with a TG header is loaded and played
back, all settings of Voice submode will be ignored. If you
wish to keep the Voice submode settings, use the Pattern /
Song job Delete Measure to delete the setup measures that
were added.
❏ Data filename extensions
When the above-mentioned five types of data are saved by
the RM1x, a filename extension (three characters indicating
the type of file) will be automatically added to the name of
the file as follows.
1. All Data
.R1A
2. Style
.R1P
3. Song
.R1S
4. SMF
.MID
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
43
BASIC CONCEPT
7. About floppy disks
MEMO
BASIC CONCEPT
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
44
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
PATTERN MODE
Chapter 2. PATTERN MODE
The PATTERN mode provides 60 preset styles - including rhythms,
beats, and instrumental parts - covering virtually the entire spectrum of
dance and contemporary music!
The PATTERN mode lets you record up to 50 original user styles which
can be used in the same way as the preset styles.
This chapter explains all the PATTERN mode operations.
1. PATTERN Playback ..................................... 46
2. Recording .................................................. 49
3. Groove ..................................................... 55
4. Play FX ...................................................... 57
5. MIDI delay ................................................ 60
6. Arpeggio .................................................. 62
7. Voice ........................................................ 63
8. Voice Edit .................................................. 65
9. Effect ........................................................ 69
10. Setup ........................................................ 73
11. Disk .......................................................... 76
12. Job ........................................................... 80
13. Edit ........................................................... 99
14. Split ........................................................ 108
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
45
1. PATTERN Playback
1. PATTERN Playback
❏ Playback
Style name
Section
Transpose
Measure
Length
PATTERN MODE
Track number
Time signature
Phrase name
Track status
Parameter
Style number / name
Jump
Keypad velocity
BPM
Track number
Transpose
Measure
Length
Time Signature
Section
Track status
Phrase name
Values
P01 ... P60, U01 ... U50
OFF, 001 ... 256
Function
Selects the style.
Specifies the measure the RM1x will “jump” to when the STOP s
button is pressed. When “OFF” the playback locations remains where
it is when playback is stopped. To specify the current measure, press
the STOP sbutton while holding the [SHIFT] button.
001 ... 127, RND1 ... RND4
Specifies the note velocity value for the RM1x keyboard. Higher
values produce louder sound. There are also four “random velocity”
settings which produce different degrees of random velocity variation. “RND1” produces the smallest variation and “RND4” produces
the greatest variation.
25 ... 300
Sets tempo for pattern playback.
01 ... 16
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
-36 ... +36
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
Sets playback start location; or shows current playback location.
Shows total length of pattern.
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4 Sets the pattern’s time signature.
A ... P
Shows the current selected section. Section selection can be accomplished by the keyboard method described on page 28.
M, S
Indicates track SOLO or track MUTE.
The highlighted track number indicates the currently selected track.
Indicates the currently selected phrase.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
To select a style and play a pattern
1 Make sure the PATTERN mode is selected (if necessary, press the MODE [PATTERN] button). “PATT 1”
should appear in the upper left-hand corner of the
LCD display.
2 Use display knob 1 to select a style (P01 … P60 are
preset styles. U01 …U50 are user styles).
3 Select a section via the keyboard as described on
page 28.
4 Press PLAY p to start playback.
The PLAY p button indicator will flash at the current BPM rate, the velocity bars above active tracks
will indicate playback level in the correpsonding tracks,
and the MEAS parameter will indicate the current
measure during playback.
5 Change sections or other parameters as required
during playback.
In the PATTERN mode the current section will continue to “loop” until another section is selected or
playbcak is stopped.
6 Press STOP s to stop playback when done.
46
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
1. PATTERN Playback
❏ Patch
Section
Transpose
Measure
Length
Track status
Phrase name
Parameter
Phrase category
Phrase number
Note shift
BPM
Track number
Transpose
Measure
Length
Time Signature
Section
Track status
Phrase name
Track number
Values
Function
Selects the phrase category.
Selects the phrase number.
-99 ... +99
Shifts the pitch of the currently selected phrase by the specified
number of semitones.
25 ... 300
Sets tempo for pattern playback.
01 ... 16
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
-36 ... +36
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
Sets playback start location; or shows current playback location.
Shows total length of pattern.
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4 Sets the pattern’s time signature.
A ... P
Shows the current selected section. Section selection can be accomplished by the keyboard method described on page 28.
M, S
Indicates track SOLO or track MUTE.
The highlighted track number indicates the currently selected track.
Indicates the currently selected phrase.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
You can use this screen to create a pattern (by arranging phrases
onto the 16 pattern tracks), or to select and replay an existing
pattern.
To create a pattern
1 After selecting the style you want to work on in the
PATTERN mode, use the MODE [PATTERN] button
to select the PATCH mode. “PATT 2 PATCH” should
appear in the upper left-hand corner of the LCD display.
2 Select the section you want to program via the keyboard as described on page 28.
3 Set the length of the section via the Length parameter.
4 Press the PLAY p button to start playback if you
want to monitor the sound of the pattern as you work
on it. The PLAY p button indicator will flash at the
current BPM rate, the velocity bars next to active
tracks will indicate playback level in the corresponding tracks, and the MEAS parameter will indicate the
current measure during playback.
5 Select the track to which you want to assign a phrase
via the keyboard as described on page 27. The corresponding track number will be highlighted on the
display.
6 Use display knobs 1 and 2 to select the category and
number of the phrase you want to assign to the current track, respectively (phrase titles are composed
of two parts: a category abbreviation on the left, and
a number on the right).
7 Continue selecting tracks and assigning phrases until your pattern is complete.
8 Press STOP s to stop playback when done.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
47
PATTERN MODE
Time signature
1. PATTERN Playback
Please note that the right edge of the “frame” surrounding the phrase names in the PATCH mode display indicates whether the
length of the phrase is less than or equal to that of the pattern, or whether it is longer than that of the pattern.
Phrase length less than or equal to pattern length.
PATTERN MODE
48
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Phrase length greater than pattern length.
2. Recording
2. Recording
The RM1x offers two general recording methods: realtime
recording and step recording.
With realtime recording, the RM1x operates as a tape recorder,
recording the performance data as it is played. This allows
you to catch all the nuances of an actual performance.
With step recording, you input the phrase one note at a time,
almost as if you were writing the notes down on a music sheet.
This allows you to create complex phrases without having to
play them in real time at the keyboard.
Preparing to Record
1 Go to the VOICE submode and assign the voice(s)
you want to use to the track(s) you intend to record,
as described on page 63.
2 Return to the PATTERN mode.
Although you can record in either the main PATTERN
or PATCH mode, you will need to start from the PATTERN mode in order to select the style to be recorded
and the recording mode (REPLACE, OVERDUB, STEP,
or GRID — described separately below).
3 Use display knob 1 to select the style you want to
record to (only user styles — U01 … U50 — are recordable).
4 Use the Length parameter to specify the length of
the phrase you intend to record, and the time signature parameter to select the desired time signature.
These changes can only be made for “empty” patterns (patterns can be cleared by using the Clear
Pattern job — page 98).
5 Press REC e to engage the record standby mode.
The red REC e button indicator will light and the
PATTERN mode display will appear as shown below.
6 Use display knob 2 to select the record mode you intend to use (“REPL” = REPLACE, “OVER” = OVERDUB,
“STEP” = STEP, and “GRID” = GRID). At this point you
can also use display knob 1 to determine whether the
pattern will loop or not during recording.
Transpose
Measure
Length
Track number
Time signature
Phrase name
Parameter
Loop on/off
Recording type
Keypad velocity
BPM
Track number
Transpose
Measure
Length
Time Signature
Track status
Phrase name
Track status
Values
ON, OFF
Replace (Realtime) Overdub (Realtime)
Step (Step) Grid (Step)
001 ... 127, RND1 ... 4
Function
Determines whether or not the pattern will loop during recording.
Selects the recording method.
Specifies the note velocity value for the RM1x keyboard. Higher
values produce louder sound. There are also four “random velocity”
settings which produce different degrees of random velocity variation. “RND1” produces the smallest variation and “RND4” produces
the greatest variation.
25 ... 300
Sets tempo for pattern playback.
01 ... 16
Shows the current selected section. Section selection can be accomplished by the keyboard method described on page 27.
-36 ... +36
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished
via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on page 27.
Sets recording start location; or shows current recording location.
Sets phrase length, in measures.
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4 Sets the pattern’s time signature.
The highlighted track number indicates the currently selected track.
Indicates the currently selected phrase.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
49
PATTERN MODE
Although the RM1x comes equipped with many preset phrases,
it also allows you to record your own user phrases. You use
the Phrase Recording submode to make these recordings.
2. Recording
Recording type
The PATTERN mode offers four different phrase recording types: two realtime types and two step types.
The REPLACE type records performance data in real time,
overwriting any data already present in the destination user
phrase. The new data replaces the previous data. This is
the type to use when you wish to redo a phrase that you
are not satisfied with or that you no longer need. (page 51)
PATTERN MODE
The OVERDUB type - the second realtime type - records
onto the selected phrase while leaving its previous data in
place. This is the method to use when you need to create a
complex, multilayer phrase. (page 51)
The STEP type lets you compose your performance by
“writing” it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime,
step recording method - similar to the process of writing
musical notations onto music paper. This method supports
“overdubbing,” since events are not removed unless you
explicitly erase them. (page 52)
The GRID type lets you record 1-measure phrases by entering notes on a 16th-note “grid” formed by the white
keys of the RM1x keyboard. The pitch, gate time, and velocity of each note entered can be set via the display knobs.
(page 54)
If the style to be recorded and recording mode have already been selected in the PATTERN mode, you can engage the record ready mode directly from the PATCH display. In this case the PATCH display will appear as shown
below.
Phrase name
Transpose Measure
Length
Time signature
Track number
Parameter
Bank MSB / LSB
Program number
Transpose on/off
Track number
Transpose
Measure
Length
Time Signature
Track status
Phrase name
Track status
Values
Function
Selects the voice to be used for playing the phrase.
Refer to the separate List Book.
Selects the voice to be used for playing the phrase.
Refer to the separate List Book.
Turns transposition on or off.
01 ... 16
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
-36 ... +36
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
Sets recording start location; or shows current recording location.
001 ... 256
Indicates phrase length, in measures.
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4 Indicates the pattern’s time signature.
M, S
Indicates track SOLO or track MUTE.
The highlighted track number indicates the currently selected track.
Indicates the currently selected phrase.
You select the number at the PATCH screen. (page 47)
You can use the Phrase Name pattern job to assign the phrase an
arbitrary phrase name. (page 95)
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
50
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
2. Recording
❏ Realtime Recording (Replace,
Overdub)
The PATTERN mode offers two realtime phrase recording
methods: REPLACE and OVERDUB.
You use the REPLACE method when you want to create a
entirely new phrase or overwrite an existing phrase. This
method erases any data already existing in the selected phrase.
n
• You can use pattern job 00 (Undo/Redo) to cancel a recording that you have just made. This allows you to recover data that you have inadvertently over-recorded. (page
82)
• Remember to set other appropriate parameters (such as
BPM, click beat, click mode, and recording count; see page
133) before beginning the recording.
• If you want true recording of velocity values, enter the
data from a remote MIDI keyboard.
You use OVERDUB when you want to overdub new data onto
the phrase’s existing data. This allows you to build up a complex, multilayered phrases.
1 After completing the “Preparing to Record” procedure
described above, select the track to record via the
RM1x keyboard as described on page 27.
2 Set the BPM to the value you want to record at.
It’s sometimes easier to set a slow tempo for realtime
recording, so you have plenty of time to enter the
data.
3 Press the PLAY p button to begin recording. The
metronome will sound and you’ll be given a onemeasure count-in prior to the first measure actually
recorded. The count-in is also indicated by negative
numbers in the “MEAS” parameter.
Play the required part either on the RM1x keyboard
or via an external MIDI keyboard.
4 Press the STOP s button when you’re ready to stop
recording. The normal PATTERN play mode is automatically re-selected when you stop recording, and
you’ll automatically be returned to the top (first measure) of the pattern.
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to record other tracks, as
required.
If you input an incorrect note, you can remove it on a
subsequent round by holding down the [SHIFT] button together with the same note key - hold both of
these keys down as the recording passes the point
where the original (bad) note was entered.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
51
PATTERN MODE
You use this recording method when you want to input your
phrase in real time. You can input the phrase directly either at
the microkeybaord, or else through a remote MIDI keyboard
or other such MIDI device. Or you can record (copy) a phrase
from a computer or from another sequencer.
2. Recording
❏ Step Recording
You use this recording mode to create a recording one note at a time, setting appropriate values for each note’s length, velocity,
and so on.
When EVENT TYPE = Note:
Track number
Pointer
Event type
PATTERN MODE
Time signature
When EVENT TYPE = PB:
Track number
Pointer
Event type
Time signature
When EVENT TYPE = CC:
Track number
Pointer
Event type
Time signature
Parameter
Pointer
Step
Keypad velocity
Value
Gate time
Rest
Tie
Delete
BkDelete
Track number
Event type
Time Signature
Values
Function
Current note position.
0060, 0080, 0120, 0160, 0240,
The “size” of the current recording step. This determines to what
0320, 0480, 0960, 1920
position the pointer will advance after a note has been entered.
001 ... 127, RND1 ... 4
The velocity value of the note to be entered
Specifies the value for event types other than “Note.” This parameter
-8192 ... +8191 (EVENT TYPE=PB),
000 ... 127 (EVENT TYPE=CC), PAD only appears when an EVENT TYPE other than “Note” is selected.
Press the [ENTER] button to actually enter the specified value.
001 ... 200
The length of the entered note. Used to produce legato, staccato,
and other effects.
Enters a rest of the currently selected note length at the note pointer position.
Lengthens the previously entered note by “tying” another note of
the same length and pitch to it.
Deletes the note or chord at the note pointer.
Moves the note pointer backward by the currently selected note
length and deletes the corresponding note or chord.
01 ... 16
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Note, PB, CC[000] ... CC[119]
Specifies the type of event to be entered.
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4 Indicates the pattern’s time signature.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
52
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
2. Recording
1 After completing the “Preparing to Record” procedure
described above, select the track to record via the
RM1x keyboard as described on page 27.
2 Press the PLAY p button to begin recording. The
STEP record display shown above will appear.
The Numeric POINTER Display
The POINTER area of the step record display shows the
current position of the note pointer in measures, 1/4-note
beats, and clocks (there are 480 clocks per 1/4 note). If
you’re not sure what measure you’re seeing on the note
display while recording, check the POINTER display.
4 Enter a note.
Once the note parameters have been specified, the
note can be entered simply by playing the appropriate key on the RM1x keyboard (or on your external
MIDI keyboard). A dot corresponding to the entered
note will appear on the note display and the note
pointer will advance to the next note position.
Chords can be entered simply by moving the note
pointer back to a note and entering another note at
the same location (this can be repeated as many
times as necessary). See “Moving Around In the Note
Display”, below.
During STEP recording you can press the PLAY p
button to start playback and monitor the material being recorded.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the current track is complete, then press STOP s to stop recording.
n
• Under step recording, note registration occurs when you
release the key(s), rather than when you press them. This
makes it easy to enter a block chord: you can pick out the
notes one by one and then release them all at the same
time.
The Note Display
The note display shows up to four 1/4-notes worth of data
at once (that’s one measure in 4/4 time). Each triangle on
the display equals a 32nd-note step. If the selected time
signature results in more than four 1/4 notes per measure,
then the display will scroll to show the extra notes.
Moving Around In the Note Display
Use Display Knob 1 to move the note pointer to any position at which you want to enter a note, or to any note that
you want to delete. You will actually hear the appropriate
note or chord when the note pointer is moved to an existing note symbol. When you move the note pointer past the
end of the note display, the next measure will appear. If
you move past the last measure in the phrase, the first
measure of the phrase will appear.
PATTERN MODE
3 Use the display knobs to set the STEP, PAD VELO,
and GATE TIME parameters as required.
PAD Entry of Non-note Values
When an event type other than “Note” is selected during
step recording, values can be entered via the RM1x keyboard when the VALUE parameter is set to PAD.
• PB Events
When the Pitch Bend (PB) event type is selected and the
VALUE parameter is set to PAD, the full -8192 … +8191
parameter range is assigned to the RM1x keyboard.
While holding the [OCT UP] button, pressing the leftmost
key enters the value “±0000,” and each key to the right
increases the value by approximately 341 per semitone.
The rightmost key enters “+8191.”
While holding the [OCT DOWN] button, pressing the
rightmost key enters the value “±0000,” and each key to
the left decreases the value by approximately 341 per semitone. The leftmost key enters “-8192.”
The keyboard can be used without holding the [OCT UP]
or [OCT DOWN] button, but in this case the center key
produces a value of “±0000” while keys to the left and
right decrease and increase the value by approximatyely
341 per semitone, respectively. The leftmost key enters
“-4096” while the rightmost key enters “+4096.”
• CC Events
When the Control Change (CC) event type is selected and
the VALUE parameter is set to PAD, the full 000 … 127
parameter range is assigned to the RM1x keyboard.
The leftmost key enters a value of “000,” and each key to
the right increases the value by 5 or 6 per semitone. The
rightmost key enters “127.”
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
53
2. Recording
❏ Step Recording (Grid)
The GRID recording mode allows for fast, easy recording of one-measure phrases via a 16th-note “grid” formed by the white
keys on the RM1x keyboard.
Track number
Transpose
Measure
Length
PATTERN MODE
Time signature
Parameter
Note
Gate time
Keypad velocity
BPM
Track number
Transpose
Measure
Length
Time Signature
Values
C-2 ... G8
001% ... 999%
Function
Specifies the pitch of the note to be entered.
The length of the entered note. Used to produce legato, staccato,
and other effects.
001 ... 127, RND1 ... RND4
The velocity value of the note to be entered.
025 ... 300
Sets the BPM rate at which the pattern will play during recording.
01 ... 16
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
-36 ... +36
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
Indicates playback start location; or shows current playback location.
Indicates phrase length, in measures.
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4 Indicates the pattern’s time signature.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
1 After completing the “Preparing to Record” procedure
described above, select the track to record via the
RM1x keyboard as described on page 27.
2 Press the PLAY p button to begin recording. The
GRID record display shown above will appear.
3 Use the Display Knobs to set the NOTE (pitch), GATE
TIME , and PAD VELO parameters as required. The
NOTE parameter can also be set by pressing the
appropriate key on the RM1x keyboard while holding
the [SHIFT] button.
4 Enter a note.
Once the note parameters have been specified, notes
can be entered at any 16th-note position within the
1-measure pattern simply by the pressing the appropriate white key on the RM1x keyboard. Each of the
54
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
16 white keys corresponds to a 16th note. When a
note is entered on the grid the corresponding key
LED will light. Notes can be “erased” simply by pressing the appropriate white key a second time so that
its indicator goes out. Only notes with the currently
specified pitch will be indicated by the key LEDs.
Chords can be entered simply by entering another
note with a different pitch at the same location. If an
odd time signature such as 5/4 is specified, the
[OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] buttons can be used to
shift the grid so that the extra note positions can be
accessed.
During GRID recording you can press the PLAYp
button to start playback and monitor the material being recorded.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the current track is complete, then press STOP s to stop recording.
3. Groove
3. Groove
❏ Grid Groove
n
• When the GRID GROOVE display is showing, playing the RM1x keyboard produces no sound and solo track assignments cannot
be changed.
Grid number
Track number
Parameter
Note offset
Values
-99 ... 00 ... +99
Function
Raises or lowers the pitch of the selected note(s) in cent increments.
Clock shift
-120 ... 000 ... +120
Gate offset
-120 ... 000 ... +120
Shifts the timing of the selected note(s) forward or back ward in
clock increments.
Lengthens or shortens the selected note(s).
Velocity offset
-127 ... 00 ... +127
Increases or decreases the velocity of the selected note(s).
Track number
01 ... 16
Grid number
-36 ... +36
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the grid number.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
1 From the PATTERN or PATCH mode press the
SUBMODE [GROOVE] button to go to the Grid
Groove display.
2 Press the PLAY p button to start pattern playback
if you want to monitor pattern playback while setting
up the groove.
3 Select the track you want to work on via the RM1x
keyboard as described on page 27.
4 Use the white keys on the RM1x keyboard to select
the note position you want to adjust. The GRID parameter in the upper right corner of the display can
also be used to select note positions. Selected note
positions will be highlighted on the grid in the LCD
display, and the indicators on the corresponding keys
of the keyboard will light. Each white key corresponds
to a 16th note location in the 1-measure groove.
Pressing the same key toggles the corresponding
note position on and off. You can also select a single
note position and de-select all others at the same
time by pressing a white key while holding the [SHIFT]
button.
5 Adjust the groove parameters as required for the selected note positions using the NOTE OFFSET,
CLOCK SHIFT, GATE OFFSET, and VELO OFFSET
knobs. Icons indicating that offset has been applied
will appear in the appropriate locations. The icons
also indicate the direction of offset and roughly the
degree of offset applied. If the pattern is longer than
1 measure, the groove settings will apply in the same
way to each measure of the pattern.
n
• When the pattern to which Grid Groove is applied has a
time signature which is longer than 4 beats (e.g. 6/4,
12/8), the 5th beat is affected in the same way as the 1st
beat on the Grid Groove display, the 6th beat corresponds
to the 2nd beat on the display, and so on.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
55
PATTERN MODE
The RM1x Grid Groove function makes it possible to adjust the pitch, timing, length, and velocity of notes in a specified track
via a 1-measure 16th-note grid to create “grooves” that would not be possible with precise sequencer-like programming. The
Grid Groove function affects pattern and arpeggio playback without actually changing the sequence data. The Grid Groove
settings will be individually retained in memory for each user style, but when applied to a preset style the Grid Groove settings
will be lost as soon as a different style is selected.
3. Groove
Recording the Grid Groove Settings
The grid groove settings can actually be merged into the sequence data as follows.
1 Make the Grid Groove settings as described above.
2 Press the [PATTERN] button to go to the Pattern playback mode.
PATTERN MODE
3 Press the REC e button to engage the record
standby mode.
4 Set the REC TYPE parameter to “OVERDUB.”
5 Press the PLAY p button to begin recording. You
don’t actually need to record any new data; the grid
groove setting will automatically be recorded.
6 Press the STOP s button to stop recording after
the pattern has played through once. The Grid Groove
settings will automatically be initialized when recording is stopped.
56
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
4. Play FX
4. Play FX
Each style stores its own PLAY FX settings. When you change to a different style, the new style’s settings automatically
become effective. Note that the PLAY FX settings apply to all 16 sections within the style.
You can continue to replay the selected pattern while working in the PLAY FX submode. The Sequencer buttons (p, s,
t, r/f) continue to operate. This means that you can monitor the results of your changes as you make them.
❏ Harmonize
The Harmonize feature adds considerable flexibility to the RM1x play effects by allowing unison harmonization to create
deliberate out-of-phase effects, octave harmony, and the addition of 2 parallel harmony lines.
The Harmonize settings will be individually retained in memory for each user style, but when applied to a preset style the
Harmonize settings will be lost as soon as a different style is selected.
Transpose
Track number
Parameter
Unison
Values
OFF, x2 ... x8
Octaver
-10 ... OFF ... +10
Harmonize 1
-99 ... OFF ... +99
Harmonize 2
-99 ... OFF ... +99
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... +36
Function
Specifies the number of unison notes to be played (at the same
pitch). This can be used to thicken the sound and produce deliberate out-of-phase effects.
Produces an octave harmony line the specified number of octaves
above or below the original notes.
Produces a parallel harmony line the specified number of semitones
above or below the original notes.
Produces a parallel harmony line the specified number of semitones
above or below the original notes.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
57
PATTERN MODE
The PLAY FX submode lets you adjust a number of pattern playback parameters to change the sound and feel of the pattern
without affecting the actual sequence data. The PLAY FX settings affect both pattern and arpeggio playback. In addition to
timing and articulation parameters such as beat stretch, clock shift, gate time, and velocity offset, the PLAY FX submode
includes a Harmonize feature which allows unison harmony, octave harmony, and the addition of parallel harmony for even
further sonic flexibility.
4. Play FX
❏ Play Fx
Transpose
Track number
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
Beat stretch
Values
25%, 33%, 50%, 66%, 75%,
100%, 125%, 150%, 200%,
300%, 400%
Clock shift
-480 ... 0 ... +480
Gate time
000% ... 100% ... 200%
Velocity offset
Track number
-127 ... 0 ... 127
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... +36
Function
Proportionally adjusts playback length of phrases on track.
If the meter is set to 4/4, for example, then setting the scale time to
50% compresses the meter to 2/4, while setting it to 75% compresses
the meter to 3/4. A 150% scale time expands the meter to 6/4; a
200% time expands it to 8/4.
Note timing also changes accordingly. At 50% scale, a quarter note
in the original phrase converts into an eighth note; at 66%, into a
quarter-note triplet; at 75%, into a dotted eighth; at 150%, into a
dotted quarter; at 200%, into a half note.
This scaling feature makes it easy to set up complex rhythms within
your patterns.
Shifts playback timing, in clock-cycle increments. See below for detail.
Gate-time modifier, used to adjust the original gate times. See below for detail.
Offset value, applied to the original velocities. See below for detail.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
Clock shift
You use this parameter to shift the playback timing by a
specified number of clock cycles.
On the RM1x, one clock cycle is equivalent to 1/480 quarter
note.
A negative value shifts the timing backward (toward the
beginning of the song), while a positive value shifts the
timing forward. A setting of +480, for example, will effectively delay the playback timing by one beat.
Original data
CLOCK SHIFT = +240
CLOCK SHIFT = -240
n
58
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
• It is not possible to shift the playback timing backwards
past the song’s original start point. If you set the value to 300, for instance, all song data in the first 300 clock cycles of the recording will be shifted back exactly to the
start point.
4. Play FX
The gate time denotes the length of time that a note is
held. For non-percussive voices, the gate time is equal to
the actual playback time span.
If you set this value to 100%, the original gate times will
be used. Setting the value below 100% will lower the gate
times, while higher values will increase them.
If an adjusted gate-time value is less than 1, the RM1x
will use a value of 1.
Original data
(Gate)
48
48
95
86
48
47
43
24
142
129
72
Gate time modifier = 50%
Recording the PLAY FX Settings
The grid groove settings can actually be merged into the sequence data as follows.
1 Make the PLAY FX settings as described above.
2 Press the [PATTERN] button to go to the Pattern playback mode.
3 Press the REC e button to engage the record
standby mode.
4 Set the REC TYPE parameter to “OVERDUB.”
5 Press the PLAY p button to begin recording. You
don’t actually need to record any new data; the grid
groove setting will automatically be recorded.
6 Press the STOP s button to stop recording after
the pattern has played through once. The PLAY FX
settings will automatically be initialized when recording is stopped.
(Gate)
24
24
Gate-time modifier = 150%
(Gate)
72
72
Velocity offset
You use this parameter to apply an offset to the track’s
velocity values.
Positive values increase the playback velocity, while negative values decrease it.
Original data
(Vel)
96
64
32
127
96
12
107
76
52
127
116
VELOCITY OFFSET = -20
(Vel)
76
44
VELOCITY OFFSET = +20
(Vel)
116
84
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
59
PATTERN MODE
Gate time
This value adjusts the gate times of the notes on the track.
Adjustment is made by multiplying the original gate time
by the modifier value (percentage).
5. MIDI delay
5. MIDI delay
MIDI Delay submode creates delay effects that can sound much the same as those created by conventional delay effect units,
but the delays are created by manipulating the MIDI note data rather than the audio signal.
❏ Delay
PATTERN MODE
Transpose
Track number
Parameter
Delay time
Values
0030, 0040, 0060, 0080, 0120,
0160, 0240, 0320, 0360, 0480,
0720, 0960, 1920
(0030 ... 1920)
Delay level
000 ... 127
Repeat times
00 ... 64
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... +36
Function
Specifies the length of the delay. Please note that the values do not
change continuously when using Display Knob 1. The delay time
can be adjusted in 1-step increments from 0030 to 1920 by placing
the cursor at the DELAY TIME parameter and using the [NO -1]/
[YES +1] buttons.
The values correspond to MIDI clocks (480 clocks per quarter note),
thus a setting of “120” produces a 16th-note delay, a setting of “240”
produces a 8th-note delay, etc.
Specifies the level (volume) of the delay sound as a percentage.
The higher the value the louder the delay sound.
Sets the number of delay repeats.
A setting “3,” for example, produces 3 repeats.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
60
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
5. MIDI delay
❏ Feedback
Parameter
Feedback velocity
Values
-127 ... 000 ... +127
Feedback note
-24 ... 00 ... +24, RND
Feedback gate time
-100 ... 000 ... +100
Feedback clock
-100 ... 000 ... +100
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... +36
Function
Offsets the velocity of the delayed notes, thereby affecting the level
of the delay sound.
By offsetting the feedback velocity of the delayed note, this parameter affects the level of the delay sound and how the repeats decay.
Positive values produce increasing repeat level, while negative values produce decreasing repeat level.
Offsets the pitch of the delayed notes so that each repeat will have
a different pitch. By setting an appropriate FB NOTE value it is possible to produce delays that sound like glissandos or even arpeggios. Each increment corresponds to a semitone.
The “RND” setting produces delay repeats with random pitch.
Offsets the gate time of the delayed notes by the specified percentage so the repeated notes become longer or shorter. Positive settings produce gradually longer repeated notes, while negative settings have the opposite effect.
Offsets the timing of the delayed notes in clock increments. Positive
settings result in an increasingly longer delay time from repeat to
repeat, while negative settings have the opposite effect.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
Recording the MIDI delay Settings
The MIDI delay settings can actually be merged into the sequence data as follows.
4 Set the REC TYPE parameter to “OVERDUB.”
1 Make the MIDI delay settings as described above.
5 Press the PLAY p button to begin recording. You
don’t actually need to record any new data; the MIDI
delay setting will automatically be recorded.
2 Press the [PATTERN] button to go to the Pattern playback mode.
3 Press the REC e button to engage the record
standby mode.
6 Press the STOP s button to stop recording after
the pattern has played through once. The MIDI delay
level setting will automatically be set to 0 when recording is stopped.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
61
PATTERN MODE
Transpose
Track number
6. Arpeggio
6. Arpeggio
This submode can be used to create simple automatic arpeggios based on notes played on the RM1x keyboard.
❏ Arpeggio Setting
Transpose
Track number
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
Values
Type
OFF, UP, DOWN, ALTER1,
ALTER2, RANDOM
Sort
ON, OFF
Hold
ON, OFF
Octave range
1 ... 4
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... +36
Function
Specifies the arpeggio type.
Normally the arpeggio will play based on the order in which the
keys are pressed. But when the SORT parameter (below) is “ON,”
the arpeggio will play according to the selected TYPE regardless of
the order in which the keys are pressed.
“UP” produces an ascending arpeggio. “DOWN” produces a descending arpeggio. “ALTER1” and “ALTER2” produce different types of
alternating arpeggio. And “RANDOM” produces a random arpeggio.
Determines whether the arpeggio notes will or will not be “sorted”
according to the selected arpeggio TYPE (above).
Determines whether the arpeggio will continue to play when the
notes are released or not.
When this parameter is “ON,” the arpeggio will continue to play when
the notes played on the RM1x keyboard or an external keyboard
are released. When “OFF” the arpeggio will stop as soon as the
notes are released.
Specifies the range of octaves the arpeggio will cover. When set to
“1,” the arpeggio will include only the notes played on the keyboard.
When set to “2,” “3,” or “4,” the arpeggio will be automatically extended to cover the specified number of octaves.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
62
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
7. Voice
7. Voice
You use the Voice submode to set various parameters (such as voice, pan, volume, and effects) for each of the pattern tracks.
You can set voice values separately for each style. The values apply to all sections (Sections A to P) of the style.
For general information about voice and effect, refer to Chapter 1. (pages 37, 39)
• The playback buttons (p,s,t,r/f) continue to function while you are adjusting the settings, so that you can monitor
the results of your changes as you make them.
PATTERN MODE
n
❏ Voice Balance
Transpose
Track number
Parameter
Bank
Program number
Pan
Volume
Track number
Transpose
Values
Function
(Refer to the separate List Book. ) Selects the voice bank.
Refer to the separate List Book for a complete listing of the RM1x
voices.
When “*** ***Phrase” appears here the bank and program change
number will be switched according to the current phrase data. When
any other bank number is selected the display bank and program
numbers will be used for all sections.
(Refer to the separate List Book. )
Selects the voice (voice number).
Refer to the separate List Book for a complete listing of the RM1x
voices.
Random, L63 ... C ... R63
Sets sound positioning for stereo playback.
L63 sets the position all the way to the left; R63 sets it all the way to
the right.
If you set the pan to Random, the position changes at random each
time a new note is sounded.
The pan value changes during playback in accordance with the
track’s MIDI pan data.
000 ... 127
Sets sound volume.
During playback, the volume changes in accordance with the track’s
MIDI volume data.
01 ... 16
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
-36 ... 0 ... +36
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
63
7. Voice
Effect Send
When variation connection = System
Transpose
When variation connection = Insertion
Transpose
Track number
PATTERN MODE
Track number
Parameter
Variation send level
(When variation
connection =System)
Variation switch
(When variation
connection =Insertion)
Values
000 ... 127
ON, OFF
Chorus send level
Reverb send level
Dry level
(When variation
connection =System)
Track number
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
Transpose
-36 ... 0 ... +36
01 ... 16
Function
Sets signal level to variation-effect block.
Selects use/nonuse of variation effect.
Note that you can set the switch ON for one track only. (When you
set the value to ON, any other ON setting automatically changes to
OFF.
Sets signal level to chorus-effect block.
Sets signal level to reverb-effect block.
Specify for each track the amount that is sent to the Dry line of the effect.
Setting appears only if variation type is set to System.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
64
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
8. Voice Edit
8. Voice Edit
You use this page to edit the sound characteristics of the voice(s) played on the selected track. You can make separate edit
settings for each track.
PATTERN MODE
Settings do not apply to the voices themselves, but only to the track. If the track’s voice changes, the settings operate on the
new voice. If you use the same voice on different tracks with different edit settings, the sound characteristics may be quite
different.
These settings are applied as offsets to the voice’s original, internal settings.
❏ EG
Transpose
Track number
Parameter
Attack Time
Values
-64 ... 00 ... +63
Decay Time
-64 ... 00 ... +63
Release Time
-64 ... 00 ... +63
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... 0 ... +36
Function
Sets the time it takes for the sound to climb to its peak volume,
starting from its initial level of 0 (at the moment when the “key” is
first “struck”). Low values produce a rapid volume rise, while higher
values produce a more gradual climb.
Sets the time it takes for the volume to drop from its peak level to its
“sustain” level. Lower values produce crisper, clearer sounds.
Sets the time it takes for the volume to fall to 0 following the “physical” release of the note. The lower the value, the faster the sound
will go off.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
These values control how volume changes over time, starting with the initial note strike and ending at the point where the sound
dies out. (Note that “EG” stand for envelope generator.)
EG
Level
Attack
time
Key on
Decay
time
Key off
Release
time
Time
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
65
8. Voice Edit
❏ Pitch Bend/Portamento
Transpose
Track number
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
Pitch Bend range
Values
-24 ... 0 ... +24
Pitch Bend
Portamento Switch on/off
-8192 ... 0000 ... +8191
ON, OFF
Portamento time
000 ... 127
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... 0 ... +36
Function
Sets the range of the pitch change that can be controlled by PITCH
BEND knob for each part.
With a setting of +12, the pitch will change one octave when pitch
bend is fully raised or lowered. With negative settings, the direction
of pitch change will be inverted.
Specifies a “preset” pitch bend value for the current track.
Specify whether or not portamento will be applied to each part.
Portamento is a function that smoothly changes the pitch between
two notes of different pitch.
Portamento will not apply to drum voices or SFX kit voices.
Specifies the pitch change speed to each part when the Portamento
Switch = ON.
Higher values will cause the pitch to change more slowly. Lower
values will produce a faster change.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
66
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
8. Voice Edit
❏ LFO
The RM1x LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) can be used to modulate pitch, filter cutoff frequency, or amplitude to create a
wide range of modulation effects.
Transpose
PATTERN MODE
Track number
Parameter
LFO rate
Values
-64 ... 00 ... +63
Pitch depth
000 ... 127
Filter depth
000 ... 127
Amp. depth
000 ... 127
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... 0 ... +36
Function
Sets the speed of the LFO.
Higher values produce faster LFO variation.
Sets the depth of LFO pitch modulation.
Periodic pitch modulation produces a vibrato-type effect. This parameter determines how deeply the LFO modulates pitch, and thus
the depth of the resultant vibrato.
Sets the depth of LFO filter modulation.
Periodic filter cutoff frequency modulation produces a wah-wah pedal
type effect. This parameter determines how deeply the LFO modulates filter cutoff frequency, and thus the depth of the resultant effect.
Sets the depth of LFO amplitude modulation.
Periodic amplitude modulation produces a tremolo effect. This parameter determines how deeply the LFO modulates amplitude, and
thus the depth of the resultant tremolo.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
67
8. Voice Edit
❏ Filter
Transpose
Track number
PATTERN MODE
Cutoff
Parameter
Values
-64 ... 0 ... +63
Resonance
-64 ... 0 ... +63
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... 0 ... +36
Function
Sets the filter cutoff frequency.
See below for detail.
Sets the filter resonance.
See below for detail.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
Cutoff
The CUTOFF value sets the cutoff frequency for the
RM1x’s low-pass filter. Adjusting this value changes the
voice’s timbre. Settings are stored separately for each track.
Note that the filter is a low-pass type: it filters out the frequencies above (higher than) the cutoff point.
Setting the cutoff to a high value will allow the high-frequency harmonics (overtones) to pass, producing a relatively bright sound that is true to the voice’s waveform.
Setting the cutoff to a low value will block out the higher
harmonics, producing a darker and smoother sound.
Resonance
The RESONANCE value sets the resonance for the lowpass filter. As with the CUTOFF value, the RESONANCE
setting affects the voice’s timbre. Again, you can set the
value separately for each track.
The term resonance here refers to the amplification (boost)
applied to the frequencies in the vicinity of the cutoff point.
A boost to the overtones within this range can have a significant impact on the sound. With careful adjustment, you
can get very effective resonance characteristics - such as
the body resonance of a string instrument, or the distinctive slur of an analog synthesizer.
Loudness
FILTER
These conponents pass.
These components
are eliminated.
Volume
Resonance
Frequency
Harmonics
Cutoff frequency
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
68
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
9. Effect
9. Effect
You use the Pattern Effects submode to select and set up the effects applied to the pattern.
The variation connection setting determines how the RM1x handles effects processing. For more information, refer to Chapter
1. (page 39)
• The playback buttons (p, s, t, r/f) continue to function while you are adjusting the settings, so that you can monitor
the results of your changes as you make them.
PATTERN MODE
n
❏ Type
When variation connection = System:
Parameter
Variation type
Values
(Refer to the separate List Book. )
Chorus type
(Refer to the separate List Book. )
Reverb type
(Refer to the separate List Book. )
Variation connection
Insertion, System
When variation connection = Insertion:
Function
Selects the variation effect type.
Refer to the separate List Book for a complete listing of the RM1x
effect types.
Selects the chorus effect type.
Refer to the separate List Book for a complete listing of the RM1x
effect types.
Selects the reverb effect type.
Refer to the separate List Book for a complete listing of the RM1x
effect types.
Selects handling of variation effect.
This setting determines whether the variation effect is handled as
an insertion effect or as a system effect. (See the illustrations on
pages 40, 41)
If you set this value to Insertion, then you can apply the variation
effect to no more than a single track. In this case, you can also use
an assignable controller to control one of the parameters for the
effect in real time.
If you set the value to System, then the variation effect operates in
the same way as the chorus and reverb effects - so that you can
apply it to all tracks, and set values for the send and return levels.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
69
9. Effect
❏ Variation Edit
page1
When variation connection = System:
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
(Available parameters
vary according to the
type.)
When variation connection = Insertion:
Values
Function
(Refer to the separate List Book. ) Refer to the separate List Book for a complete listing of the RM1x
effect parameters.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
page2
When variation connection = System:
Parameter
(Available parameters vary
according to the type.)
Send Variation to Chorus
Dry/wet balance
Send Variation to Reverb
Variation Pan
When variation connection = Insertion:
Values
Function
(Refer to the separate List Book. ) Refer to the separate List Book for a complete listing of the RM1x
effect parameters.
000 ... 127
Sets level on bus from variation effect block to chorus block.
Setting appears only if variation type is set to System.
D63>W ... D=W ... D<W63
Sets balance between wet sound (sound passed through variation
effect) and dry (non-effected) sound.
Setting appears only if variation type is set to Insertion.
000 ... 127
Sets level on bus from variation effect block to reverb block.
Setting appears only if variation type is set to System.
L63 ... C ... R63
Sets stereo positioning of signal from variation effect block.
Setting appears only if variation type is set to System.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
70
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
9. Effect
❏ Chorus Edit
Parameter
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
FB Level
Values
0.00Hz ... 39.7Hz
000 ... 127
-63 ... 00 ... +63
Delay Offset
000 ... 063
Function
Sets delay modulation frequency.
Sets delay modulation depth.
Sets level at which the delay output is returned to the input (negative values invert the phase).
Sets offset value for delay modulation.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
page2
Parameter
Send Chorus to Reverb
Chorus Pan
Values
000 ... 127
L63 ... C ... R63
Function
Sets level on bus from chorus block to reverb block.
Sets stereo positioning of signal from chorus block.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
❏ Reverb Edit
page1
Parameter
Reverb time
Diffusion
InitDelay
HPF Cutoff
Values
0.3s ... 30s
00 ... 10
00 ... 63
THRU, 22Hz ... 8.0kHz
Function
Sets reverb length.
Sets spread of the reverb.
Sets delay time until the early reflections.
Sets frequency at which the high pass filter will cut the low range.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
71
PATTERN MODE
page1
9. Effect
page2
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
LPF Cutoff
Reverb Pan
Values
1.0Hz ... 18kHz, THRU
L63 ... C ... R63
Function
Sets frequency at which the low pass filter will cut the high range.
Sets stereo positioning of signal from reverb block.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
72
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
10. Setup
10. Setup
❏ Low Boost
PATTERN MODE
This feature can be used to boost or cut the low frequencies. Both the cutoff frequency and gain are adjustable for maximum
flexibility.
Parameter
Frequency
Gain
Values
50Hz ... 2.0KHz
-24 dB ... 0dB ... +24dB
Function
Sets the cutoff frequency of the low boost equalizer.
Sets the amount of low-frequency boost or cut. Positive settings
boosts the lows, while negative settings produce low-frequency cut.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
73
10. Setup
❏ Knob Assign
This function makes it possible to assign different parameters to the RM1x’s 8 realtime controller knobs (see page 29 for more
on the controller knobs).
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
Template
Values
DEFLT, VOLUME, PAN,
REVERB, CHORUS, VARI.,
Knob number
A1 ... A8, B1 … B8
Parameter
DEFLT, CC007, CC010, CC091,
CC093, CC094
(CC001 ... CC030, CC032 ...
CC119)
Track
AUTO, 01 ... 16
Function
This parameter provides a selection of preset knob assignments,
including the RM1x’s default assignments (more below). The “DEFLT”
setting recalls the RM1x’s default knob assignments (corresponding to the assignments labeled on the panel). The “VOLUME” template assigns each knob to control volume on the corresponding
track — the “A” group controls tracks 1 through 8, and the “B” group
controls tracks 9 through 16. The “PAN,” “REVERB,” “CHORUS,” and
“VARI.” templates assign the knobs to control pan, reverb send level,
chorus send level, and variation effect send level, respectively, on
the corresponding tracks in the same way.
Selects a knob for assignment. The “A” group assignments (A1 …
A8) are selected when the [KNOB] button indicator is lit, and the “B”
group assignments (B1 … B8) are selected when the [KNOB] button indicator is out.
Specifies the parameter to be assigned to the currently selected
knob. “DEFLT” is the default paremeter. “CC007” is master volume.
“CC010” is pan. “CC091” is reverb send level. “CC093” is chorus
send level. “CC094” is variation effect send level. Please note that
the values do not change continuously when using display knob 3.
Parameters can be selected in 1-step increments from CC001 to
CC119 by placing the cursor at the PARAMETER and using the
[NO -1]/[YES +1] buttons.
Specifies the track to which control will be applied by the currently
selected controller knob. When “AUTO” is selected control will be
applied to the track selected in the PATTERN or SONG playback
mode.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
74
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
10. Setup
❏ Out Channel
You use the TO TG setting to set the track’s output channel to the tone generator block.
You use the MIDI OUT settings to assign each track to a MIDI OUT channel.
The RM1x stores separate channel arrangements for each style. The assignments automatically change each time you switch to
a different style.
PATTERN MODE
Track number
Parameter
TO TG channel setup
Values
OFF, 01 ... 16
MIDI OUT channel setup
OFF, 01 ... 16
Track number
01 ... 16
Function
Sets up channel transmission to the tone generator block.
When set to OFF, track data is not sent to TG block.
Sets up channel transmission to the MIDI OUT connector.
When set to OFF, RM1x does not send data to MIDI OUT.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
75
11. Disk
11. Disk
In the Disk submode, data can be transferred between a floppy disk and the RM1x.
The Disk submode contains the following five groups of operations.
PATTERN MODE
Save
Load
Rename
Delete
Format
Lets you save data from internal memory to floppy disk.
Lets you load files from floppy disk into internal memory.
Lets you modify the filename of a file that was saved on floppy disk.
Lets you delete a file from floppy disk.
Lets you format (initialize) a floppy disk.
❏ Save
Parameter
File type
Values
PATT, SMF, SMF+TG Header, ALL
Style number
File name location
File name Character
SAVE!
Default name
Character Delete
U01 ... U50
Enter
A ... ~
-
Function
Specifies the file type.
You can select one of five types of file to be saved. For details on the
types of file, refer to “Types of file used by the RM1x.” (page 43)
Selects the user style to be saved.
Sets the character cursor at any location within the 8-character file name.
Selects a character to be inserted at the current character location.
Executes the save operation.
Automatically enters the default file name.
Moves the character cursor back one location and deletes the character at that location.
Enters the character selected by display knob 4 (CHARACTER) at
the current character location in the file name.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
1 Insert a properly formatted floppy disk into the RM1x
disk drive — shutter first with the label side facing
upward. Insert the disk carefully until it clicks into
place. If you need to format a disk first, see “Format”
on page 79.
5 Press the [YES+1] button to go ahead with the save
operation, or the [NO-1] button to cancel. An “Executing” bar graph will appear while the data is being
saved.
n
2 Use Display Knobs 1 and 2 to specify the type and
number of the file to be saved.
Please note that when saving a pattern data as an
SMF file it is also necessary to specify the section to
be saved via the keyboard (the keyboard indicator
corresponding to the selected section will flash).
3 Enter a new file name if necessary. Use Display Knobs
3 and 4 to select a character location and character,
then press the F4 function button (Enter) to enter the
specified character at the selected location. Repeat
until the file name is complete.
4 Press the F1 function button (SAVE!). The “Are you sure?
(Yes/No)” confirmation prompt will appear on the display.
76
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
• Before a floppy disk can be used to save data, it must first
be formatted. (page 79)
• If the size of the data to be saved is greater than the free
area of the floppy disk, a message of “Disk Full” will appear. If this occurs, delete unwanted files from the disk,
and try the Save operation once again.
• Be careful that you do not accidentally delete important
data from the disk.
• When saving a style, memory numbers for which there is
no data will be displayed as “********”. If you attempt to
save such styles, a message of “No Data” will appear, and
it will not be possible to execute the Save operation.
• The disk write-protect slide must be in the write-enable
position to perform a save operation. If it is not, the “Write
Protected!” error message will appear when you attempt
to execute the save operation.
11. Disk
Parameter
File type
PATT, ALL
Values
Disk file
Style/section
LOAD!
PrePlay
U01 ... U50 / A ... P
-
Function
Specifies the file type.
You can select one of two types of file to be loaded. For details on
the types of file, refer to “Types of file used by the RM1x.” (page 43)
Selects the file to be loaded.
Selects the loading destination style and/or section.
Executes the load operation.
Plays the file before you execute loading if you have selected Pattern as the file type, and if a Standard MIDI File format 0 file is
selected.
This is a convenient way to check the contents of the file.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
1 Insert the disk containing the file you want to load
into the RM1x disk drive.
2 Use Display Knob 1 to select the type of file you want
to load: “PATT” to show only pattern files in the file
list, or “ALL” to show all available files in the file list.
3 Use Display Knob 2 to select the file you want to load
from the file list on the display.
5 Press the F1 function button (LOAD!). The “Are you
sure? (Yes/No)” confirmation prompt will appear on
the display.
6 Press the [YES + 1] button to go ahead with the load
operation, or the [NO - 1] button to cancel. An “Executing” bar graph will appear while the data is being
loaded.
n
4 Use Display Knob 4 to select the user pattern to which
you want the data to be loaded.
Please note that when loading an SMF file it is also
necessary to specify the section to which the data is
to be loaded via the keyboard (the keyboard indicator corresponding to the selected section will flash).
• When an All Data file is loaded, all data in memory such
as Patterns, Pattern chains, Phrases, Songs, and System
setup data will be overwritten. If internal memory contains data that you wish to save, save it to disk before loading other data.
• If the data to be loaded is larger than the remaining free
memory, a message of “Memory Full” will appear. If this
occurs, delete unneeded data and repeat the Load operation.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
77
PATTERN MODE
❏ Load
11. Disk
❏ Rename
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
File type
Values
PATT, ALL
Disk file
File name location
File name Character
RENAME!
Character Delete
Enter
A ... ~
-
Function
Specifies the file type.
You can select one of two types of file to rename. For details on the
types of file, refer to “Types of file used by the RM1x.” (page 43)
Selects the file to rename.
Sets the character cursor at any location within the 8-character file
name.
Selects a character to be inserted at the current character location.
Executes the rename operation.
Moves the character cursor back one location and deletes the character at that location.
Enters the character selected by Display Knob 4 (CHARACTER) at
the current character location in the file name.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
1 Make sure the disk containing the file you want to
rename is properly inserted into the RM1x floppy disk
drive.
2 Use Display Knob 1 to select the type of file you want
to rename: “PATT” to show only pattern files in the file
list, or “ALL” to show all available files in the file list.
3 Use Display Knob 2 to select the file you want to rename from the file list on the display.
4 Enter a new file name. Use Display Knobs 3 and 4 to
select a character location and character, then press
the F4 function button (Enter) to enter the specified
character at the selected location. Repeat until the
file name is complete.
5 Press the F1 function button (RENAME!). “Executing” will appear while the file is being renamed.
78
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
n
• If the filename extension of an SMF file is renamed, it
may become impossible to load the file.
• The disk write-protect slide must be in the write-enable
position to perform a rename operation. If it is not, the
“Write Protected!” error message will appear when you
attempt to execute the rename operation.
11. Disk
Parameter
File type
Values
PATT, ALL
Disk file
DELETE!
FORMAT!
Function
Specifies the file type.
You can select one of two types of file to delete or format. For details
on the types of file, refer to “Types of file used by the RM1x.” (page
43)
Selects the file to delete.
Executes the delete operation.
Executes the format operation.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
Delete
1 Insert the disk containing the file you want to delete
into the RM1x disk drive.
2 Use Display Knob 1 to select the type of file you want
to delete: “PATT” to show only pattern files in the file
list, or “ALL” to show all available files in the file list.
3 Use Display Knob 2 to select the file you want to delete from the file list on the display.
n
• If Delete is executed, the specified file will be lost forever
and cannot be recovered. Before executing this operation,
be sure that you really want to delete the file.
• If data is already saved on the disk, be careful not to format it. If you format the disk, all the previously recorded
data will be deleted.
• The “Disk Information” area located in the right of the
screen shows the size of the selected file, the total size of
all files, and the free area on the floppy disk. You can refer
to this area when deciding which files to delete.
4 Press the F1 function button (DELETE!). The “Are
you sure? (Yes/No)” confirmation prompt will appear
on the display.
5 Press the [YES + 1] button to go ahead with the delete operation, or the [NO - 1] button to cancel. “Executing” will appear while the data is being deleted.
Format
1 Insert the disk you want to format into the RM1x disk
drive.
2 Press the F4 function button (FORMAT!). The “Are
you sure? (Yes/No)” confirmation prompt will appear
on the display.
3 Press the [YES + 1] button to go ahead with the format operation, or the [NO - 1] button to cancel. An
“Executing” bar graph will appear while the disk is
being formatted.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
79
PATTERN MODE
❏ Delete/Format/Information
12. Job
12. Job
You use the RM1x’s pattern jobs to perform various operations on phrases and patterns.
You select the job from the job list using the Display Knob 1, 2 or the CURSOR buttons. You can also make your selection
using the F4 button.
PATTERN MODE
❏ Job List
Category
UNDO/REDO
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Values
Undo/Redo
Quantize
Modify Velocity
Modify Gate Time
Crescendo
Transpose
Glide
Create Roll
Chord Sort
Chord Separate
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
10
11
12
13
Shift Clock
Copy Event
Erase Event
Extract Event
EVENT
14 Create Continuous Data
EVENT
EVENT
15 Thin Out
16 Modify Control Data
EVENT
PHRASE
PHRASE
PHRASE
PHRASE
PHRASE
PHRASE
PHRASE
PHRASE
PHRASE
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
TRACK
30 Normalize Play Effect
TRACK
31 Divide Drum Track
PATTERN
PATTERN
PATTERN
PATTERN
PATTERN
32
33
34
35
36
80
Time Stretch
Copy Phrase
Exchange Phrase
Mix Phrase
Append Phrase
Split Phrase
Get Phrase
Put Phrase
Clear Phrase
Phrase Name
Copy Track
Exchange Track
Clear Track
Copy Pattern
Append Pattern
Split Pattern
Clear Pattern
Style Name
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Function
If UNDO: Cancel the last operation. If REDO: Cancel the last UNDO
Quantize note events within selected segment of selected user phrase.
Change velocities in selected segment of selected user phrase.
Change gate times in selected segment of selected user phrase.
Gradually increase/decrease velocity over selected segment.
Transpose all notes over selected segment.
Produces smooth glides from note to note in the selected segment.
Inserts repeated note data in the specified segment to create rapid rolls.
Sort each chordal note event (within specified segment) by pitch.
Break each chordal note event (within specified segment) into individual
notes, separated by designated delay time.
Shift all data (within specified segment) by specified number of clock cycles.
Copy all events in specified segment to designated destination.
Erase all events over selected segment (and replaces with rests).
Move events of specified type from specified segment of one phrase to same
segment in another.
Creates the specified type of continuous control change data in the specified
segment.
Reduce repetitions of specified event type (within specified segment).
Changes of offsets the values of all occurences of the specified type of
control change data with the specified segment.
Expand or compress timing over specified segment.
Copy phrase into specified destination.
Exchanges the contents of two specified phrases.
Mix one phrase into another.
Append one phrase to another.
Split phrase into two phrases.
Create user phrase from selected song data.
Copy user phrase into song.
Delete all data from user phrase.
Assign name to user phrase.
Copies the data from one specified track to a second specified track.
Exchanges the contents of two specified tracks.
Delete all data from selected track, cancel voice setting, and reinitialize play
effects.
Actually applies the PLAY FX and GRID GROOVE settings to the sequence
data, overwriting the existing sequence data.
Separates the note events in a specified track and places the notes corresponding to different drum instruments in separate tracks.
Copy data from selected pattern track into destination pattern track.
Append one pattern to another.
Split pattern into two patterns.
Delete all data from selected pattern.
Assign a name to the selected style.
page
82
82
84
85
86
87
87
88
88
89
89
89
90
90
91
91
92
92
92
93
93
93
94
94
95
95
95
95
96
96
96
97
97
97
98
98
98
Parameter
Category
Job
Select
Values
UNDO/REDO, NOTE, EVENT,
PHRASE, TRACK, PATTERN
00 ... 36
PATTERN MODE
12. Job
Function
Selects the category.
Selects the job.
Jumps to the job currently selected in the job list.
To Select a Job
1 Press the SUBMODE [JOB] button. You will be presented with a job “menu.”
n
• Do not switch off the power while a job is executing (while
the “Executing...” message is on the screen), as this may
cause destruction of your recorded data.
2 Select a job. There are several ways to do this, as
listed below:
CURSOR buttons
Display Knobs
[NO - 1]/[YES + 1] buttons
Numeric Selection
Use the CURSOR buttons to scroll to the desired job, then press the
Select function button (F4, below “Select” on the display).
Use the knob below “JOB” on the display to scroll through the job list,
then press the Select function button (F4, below “Select” on the display). You can also use the CATEGORY knob to switch between job
categories (listed to the left of the jobs).
Press the [NO - 1] or [YES + 1] button once briefly to single-step through
the menu in the corresponding direction, or hold the button for continuous scrolling. When the desired job has been highlighted, press the
Select function button (F4, below “Select” on the display).
Use the numeric entry method described on page 26 to enter the
number of the desired job. The job number will flash in the upper right
corner of the display. Then press the [EXIT] button.
3 Press the F4 function button (Select) to go to the
selected job.
4 Set the job parameters as required. The job parameters are described in the job descriptions which follow.
5 Press the F4 function button (DO!) to execute the
job.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
81
12. Job
❏ Undo/Redo
❏ Note
Job 00 Undo/Redo
1
Job 01 Quantize
1
2
3
5
PATTERN MODE
2
The Undo job cancels the changes you made in your most
recent patch session, recording session, editing session, or job,
restoring the data to its previous state. This allows you to recover from accidental data loss.
The Redo job, which becomes available only after you execute an Undo, cancels the Undo and restores the changes.
The Undo/Redo job is effective on PATTERN mode patch
sessions, and on PATTERN mode and SONG mode recording
sessions, editing sessions, and jobs (with the exception of the
Song Name and Phrase Name jobs).
The Undo job is effective only on the most recent data changes.
If you run a recording session and then an editing session, for
example, the Undo will be available only for the editing session. (But note that if you move to a recording, editing, or job
screen and then quit without making any changes, this does
not count as a session.)
You can undo and then redo the same change as many times
as you like (provided that you don’t make any other changes
in between). This can be useful when you want to compare
two versions of your data.
1. Undo/Redo indication
The screen displays the word Undo or Redo to indicate
the job that is currently available.
As soon as you execute an Undo, the job name changes
to Redo. The Redo will remain available until you
change data again.
2. Undo/Redo target
The two entries at the bottom of the screen identify the
data-change currently available for undoing or redoing. This will be the most recently executed editing,
recording, or job-related data change. (In the example
above, the most recent change was made by running
the Quantize job under the PATTERN mode.)
82
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
4
6
This job quantizes note events over a specified segment of a
specified track. Quantizing is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by pulling them closer to the nearest interval boundary (or quantizing line). You can use this feature,
for example, to improve the timing of a performance you recorded in real time.
Before running the job, you must set the musical interval (or
quantizing value) that you want to use. This value sets the
distance between adjacent quantizing lines. The figure below
illustrates the concept for quarter-note and eighth-note
quantizing values.
Original note data
Quarter-note length
Result when quantizing value is
Result when quantizing value is
(at 100% strength)
(at 100% strength)
The quantizing strength determines how closely notes are
pulled toward the nearest quantizing line.
The swing rate can be used to slightly delay the note events in
every even-numbered interval, thereby adding a “swing” to
the music. If you are using an eighth-note quantizing value,
for example, the delay applies to all notes starting within the
second, fourth, sixth, or eighth interval of the measures, as
illustrated.
Quarter-note length
Original timing
Quantizing value =
, Swing rate = 50% (no delay)
Quantizing value =
, Swing rate = 60% (delay applied)
12. Job
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 999:8:479
Original data (assuming 4/4 meter)
Quantizing strength = 100% (where quantize value =
)
Quantizing strength = 50% (where quantize value =
)
■ Settings : 000% ... 100%
5. Swing rate
This setting lets you apply a delay to the notes in every
even-numbered quantizing interval (but see below) to
produce a more swinging rhythm. This adjustment is carried out after quantizing is completed: first the notes are
quantized, and then the swing delay (if any) is applied.
3. Quantizing value
The Quantize value selects the quantizing interval. You
can set the value using the [NO - 1] or [YES + 1] button, or by pressing the appropriate note key on the numeric keypad.
If you are using a 32nd, 16th, 8th, or quarter-note
quantizing value, the RM1x applies the delay to every
even-numbered interval. If you are using an 8th-note,
for example, then the notes in the first 8th-note interval
are normal, the notes in the second 8th-note interval are
delayed, the notes in third interval are normal, and so
on.
Notice that the settings create both “normal” and “triplet” intervals over the same space. The
for example, sets quantizing lines at every eighth-note spacing
and at every eighth-note-triplet spacing.
■ Settings :
32nd-note intervals
16th-triplet intervals
If you are using one of the triplet quantizing values,
then the RM1x applies the delay to the notes in every
or
quantizing
third interval. If you are using the
value, the RM1x applies the delay to the non-triplet part
of the rhythm only (to the or rhythm only).
The “swing rate” is given as a scale value indicating
the position for the shifted “beat.” For non-triplet
rhythms, a value of 50% leaves the position unchanged,
while higher values apply a delay. (In this case, 100%
represents double the length of the quantizing interval.)
The available settings depend on the rhythm type, as
described below.
16th-note intervals
8th-triplet intervals
8th-note intervals
Quarter-note-triplet intervals
Quarter-note intervals
16th-note and 16th-triplet intervals
8th-note and 8th-triplet intervals
4. Strength
The Strength value sets the degree by which note events
are pulled toward the nearest quantizing line.
A setting of 100% pulls each note event all the way to
the nearest quantizing line. A setting of 50% pulls each
note only halfway to the nearest quantizing line.
Where quantizing value is
0%
,
,
50%
or
:
75%
100%
Setting range
For the quantizing values indicated above, a 50% setting produces no adjustment, so that the even-numbered
interval remains exactly centered. Higher values shift
the interval to the right, to produce an added swing.
The maximum setting is 75%, which shifts the interval
by an amount equal to one-half the quantizing value.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
83
PATTERN MODE
Finally, you can further improve the swing by adjusting the
gate times of the notes in every other interval.
12. Job
Where quantizing value is
0%
,
or
33%
The gate time is the length of time that a note is held.
You can use this setting, therefore, to lengthen or shorten
the notes in the swing-adjusted intervals.
:
66%
83%
100%
Setting range
PATTERN MODE
With the triplet quantizing values (see above), the RM1x
applies the shift to the third interval only. In this case, a
66% setting produces no adjustment (so that the third
interval remains at its original position). Higher values
shift the interval to the right. The maximum setting is
83%, which shifts the interval by an amount equal to
one-half the quantizing value. (Notice that in this case,
the 100% scale represents three times the quantizing
length.)
Where quantizing value is
0%
33%
,
50%
100%
In the case of normal-plus-triplet quantizing values, the
RM1x applies the shift only to the non-triplet part of
the rhythm, as illustrated above. In this case, a setting
of 50% produces no shift, while higher values shift the
even interval to the right. Note that the maximum setting is 66%, which moves the interval all the way up to
the position of the third note in the triplet rhythm. (The
100% scale represents double the or quantizing
length.)
■ Settings :
If quantizing value is , , ,
: 50% ... 75%
If quantizing value is ,
or
: 66% ... 83%
If quantizing value is
or
: 50% ... 66%
• If you set STRENGTH below 100%, notes may lie at arbitrary locations within the interval prior to the “swingrate” shift. In this case, the RM1x will slide all of the notes
within the interval by an equal amount.
• Where STRENGTH is less than 100%, therefore, it is possible that the swing adjustment may push some notes into
the next interval. If the RM1x must push a note beyond
one or more notes lying in the next interval, it will shift
these other notes to the same location as well.
6. Swing Gate Time
This value applies a proportional adjustment to the gate
timing of the notes within the swing-adjusted intervals.
84
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Job 02 Modify Velocity
1
2
4
Setting range
n
If an adjusted gate-time value is less than 1, the RM1x
sets the value to 1.
■ Settings : 000% ... 100% ... 200%
3
:
66%
A setting of 100% leaves the original gate time unchanged. Higher settings increase the gate time, while
lower settings shorten it.
5
This job alters the velocity values of the specified range of
notes (pitches) in the specified segment of the designated track.
Remember that velocity refers to the force with which a note
is struck. The precise effect of a velocity change varies according to the voice: in most cases a higher velocity produces
a louder sound.
Using this job, you can choose to set all targeted notes to an
identical velocity value, or you can apply a relative (linear)
adjustment to the original velocity values.
If making a relative adjustment, you use two parameters: the
Rate and the Offset. The Rate value applies a proportional
change to the velocity value, while the Offset value (which is
applied after the Rate adjustment) adds a fixed value. The relation is as follows:
Adjusted velocity = (original velocity X Rate) + Offset.
If the adjustment result is less than 1, the RM1x sets the value
to 1. If the result is higher than 127, the RM1x sets the value
to 127.
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 999:8:479
12. Job
Note that if the setting is other than Off, the Rate and
Offset values are ignored.
■ Settings : Off (0), 001 ... 127
4. Rate
The Rate parameter applies a proportional change to
the velocities of all targeted notes. A setting of 100%
produces no change; a setting of 50% cuts the velocities in half; a setting of 200% causes the velocities to
double.
■ Settings : 000% ... 100% ... 200%
Original velocities
5. Offset
This parameter adds a fixed value to each of the Rateadjusted velocity values. A setting of 0 produces no
change. Positive values increase the velocity, while
negative values decrease it.
■ Settings : -99 ... +00 ... +99
Original velocities
PATTERN MODE
3. Set all
Use this parameter if you want to set the velocities of
all targeted notes to the same fixed value (1 to 127). If
you do not want to use this feature (if you want to make
the linear adjustment instead), set the value to Off.
(Vel)
96
64
32
127
96
44
12
107
76
84
52
127
116
Offset = -20
(Vel)
76
Offset = +20
(Vel)
96
64
32
127
96
Rate = 50%
(Vel)
116
(Vel)
48
32
16
63
48
Job 03 Modify Gate Time
1
Rate = 150%
2
3
(Vel)
4
127
96
48
127
127
This job alters the gate times of5the specified range of notes
(pitches) in the specified segment of the designated track. The
gate time refers to the length of time that a note is held. For
non-percussive voices, the gate time is equal to the actual playback time span.
Using this job, you can choose to change all targeted notes to
some fixed gate time, or you can apply a relative (linear) adjustment to the original gate times.
If making a relative adjustment, you use two parameters: the
Rate and the Offset. The Rate value applies a proportional
change to the gate time, while the Offset value (which is applied after the Rate adjustment) adds a fixed value. The relation is as follows:
Adjusted gate time
= (original gate time X Rate) + Offset.
If the adjustment result is less than 1, the RM1x sets the value
to 1.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
85
12. Job
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
PATTERN MODE
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
3. Set all
Use this parameter if you want to set all targeted notes
to some identical gate time (1 to 9999). If you do not
want to use this feature (if you want to make the linear
adjustment instead), set the value to Off.
Note that if the setting is other than Off, the Rate and
Offset values are ignored.
■ Settings: Off (0), 0001 ... 9999
5. Offset
This parameter adds a fixed value to each of the Rateadjusted gate times. A setting of 0 produces no change.
Positive values increase the gate time, while negative
values decrease it.
■ Settings: -9999 ... +0000 ... +9999
Original gate timing
(Gate)
32
32
32
48
48
12
12
12
28
28
52
52
68
68
Offset = -20
(Gate)
Offset = +20
(Gate)
52
4. Rate
The Rate parameter applies a proportional change to
the gate timing of all targeted notes. A setting of 100%
produces no change; a setting of 50% cuts the gate time
in half; a setting of 200% causes the gate time to double.
■ Settings: 000% ... 100% ... 200%
Job 04 Crescendo
1
2
3
Original gate timing
(Gate)
32
32
32
48
48
16
16
24
24
Rate = 50%
You use this job to apply a crescendo or decrescendo to the
specified range of notes (pitches) in the specified segment of
the designated track. The RM1x produces the effect by applying a slight velocity adjustment (offset) at the beginning of
the segment, with the offset increasing gradually up until the
end of the segment.
(Gate)
16
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
Rate = 150%
(Gate)
48
48
48
72
72
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
3. Velocity Range
You use the Velocity Range parameter to set the intensity of the crescendo.
This setting selects the value added to the velocities of
notes at the final meter and beat of the segment. The
RM1x gradually increases the amount added to (or sub-
86
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
12. Job
Velocity cannot be less than 1 or higher than 127. Adjusted valves below 1 are raised to 1, adjusted values
above 127 are set to 127.
■ Settings : -127 ... 0 ... +127
3. Note range (Note = C-2~G8)
Sets the note range to be transposed.
■ Settings : C-2 ... G8
4. Transpose
The Transpose value sets the number of transposition
intervals (semitones). A value of +12 would transpose
all targeted notes up by exactly one octave, while a value
of -12 would transpose down by an octave.
■ Settings : -127 ... +000 ... +127
Original velocities
Job 06 Glide
1
2
(Vel)
64
64
64
64
64
64
Range = +50 (M: 001:1 ~ 003:1)
3
4
Replaces all notes following the first note in the specified segment with pitch bend data, producing smooth glides from note
to note.
(Vel)
64
74
84
94
104
114
Range = –50 (M: 001:1 ~ 003:1)
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
(Vel)
64
54
44
34
21
14
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
Job 05 Transpose
1
2
3
4
You use this job to tranpose a specified range of notes (pitches)
in a specified segment of the designated track. You set the
transposition level in semitone increments.
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
3. Time
Specifies the length of the glide. Higher values produce a longer glide between notes.
■ Settings : 000 ... 100
4. PB Range
Specifies the maximum pitch bend range to be applied
by the glide job in semitone increments.
■ Settings : 01 ... 24
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
87
PATTERN MODE
tracted from) the velocities within the segment, beginning with a “0” amount at the beginning of the segment, and ending with the full Range amount at the end
of the segment.
12. Job
Job 07 Create Roll
1
Sorting is by pitch. If notes E3, C3, and G3 all begin at the
same time, the job adjusts the sequence to C3, E3, G3 (if the
Type setting is “up”) to G3, E3, C3 (if “down”).
2
3
4
PATTERN MODE
5
Creates a series of repeated notes in the specified segment
with the specified continuous changes in clock step and velocity. This job is ideal for creating fast “rolls.”
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
3. Note (C3)
Sets the note to be rolled.
■ Settings : C-2 ... G8
4. StepClock
Specifies the size of the step (i.e. the number of clocks)
between each note in the roll. Both the starting and ending clock values can be specified, making it easy to
create rolls in which the step size varies from note to
note.
■ Settings : 001 ... 999
5. Velocity
Specifies the velocity of each note in the roll. Both the
starting and ending velocity values can be specified,
making it easy to create rolls in which the velocity varies from note to note.
■ Settings : 001 ... 127
Job 08 Chord Sort
1
2
3
4
This job “sorts” chord events (simultaneous note events) by
order of pitch. The sort is reflected in the EDIT page listing,
and determines the separation sequence used by the Chord
Separate job (see next page).
88
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
3. Type
Determines how the chord note data is sorted. If “up”
the notes are sorted in ascending order. If “down” the
notes are sorted in descending order. “up&down” sorts
chord notes on downbeats in ascending order and chord
notes on up beats in descending order. “down&up” sorts
chord notes on downbeats in descending order and chord
notes on up beats in ascending order.
■ Settings : up, down, up&down, down&up
4. Grid
Specifies the “grid” timing which will determine what
note groups are considered chords. Notes falling within
the specified grid step will be treated as chords.
■ Settings :
32nd-note intervals
16th-triplet intervals
16th-note intervals
8th-triplet intervals
8th-note intervals
Quarter-note-triplet intervals
Quarter-note intervals
12. Job
Job 09 Chord Separate
2
Note that this job will never move an event past the designated segment’s start or end points; any event that would otherwise move past this point is instead deposited at the segment’s border.
3
This job plays opens each chord formation (within the specified segment of the specified track) into its individual notes,
inserting a specified delay between each note.
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
If the Clock value is set to 30, a block chord consisting of
elements C3, E3, G3 will be played as a C3 (at the chord’s
original timing) followed 30 cycles later by the E3, and then
another 30 cycles later by the G3. This feature is useful, for
example, when you want to open up guitar strokes.
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257: 1:000
Note that it is not possible to break chords over the next measure boundary or into the next chord.
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
3. Clock cycles
The Clock value sets the number of clock cycles inserted between adjacent chord notes.
Note that there are 480 clock cycles per beat.
■ Settings: 000 ... 999
3. Clock
The Clock value sets the number of measure, beat, and
clock for the data shift.
Note that there are 480 cycles per beat.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 255: 3:479
4. Direction
Specifies the direction in which the data will be shifted.
“ADVANCE” moves the data toward the beginning of
the piece (i.e. notes will sound earlier), while “DELAY”
shifts the data toward the end of the piece (i.e. notes
will sound later).
■ Settings : ADVANCE, DELAY
Job 11 Copy Event
1
2
❏ Event
Job 10 Shift Clock
1
2
4
4
3
This job copies all data from a specified source area (phrase)
to a specified destination, overwriting any data already existing at the destination.
3
This job executes a time shift of all data events on the selected segment of the selected track. The shift is executed in
clock-cycle increments.
1. Source phrase
The Phrs value selects the track from which the data
are copied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
89
PATTERN MODE
1
If you wish to move events by one or more full beats or measures, you may find it easier to use the Copy Event job. (below)
12. Job
2. Source segment
The upper “M” values set the phrase segment from
which data are copied.
■ Settings: Measure: beat:clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
PATTERN MODE
3. Start point of destination segment
The lower “M” value set the start point for the copy on
the destination phrase.
■ Settings: Measure: beat:clock
001:1:000 ... 257:4:479
4. Times
This multiplier specifies the number of times the segment is copied.
■ Settings : 01 ... 99
Job 12 Erase Event
1
2
3
This job clears all data from the specified segment of the designated style, so that the segment becomes silent.
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase from which data are to be cleared.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase to be cleared.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 999:8:479
3. Event
Sets the event type to be cleared (at the center of the
screen).
■ Settings : Note Note events
PC
Program change
PB
Pitch bend
CC
Control change (Any single
control-change message type
000 to 127, or all controlchange messages)
CAT Channel aftertouch
PAT Polyphonic aftertouch
EXC System exclusive
ALL All events
90
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Job 13 Extract Event
1
2
3
4
This job moves all instances of specified event data from a
selected segment of a phrase to the same segment on a different phrase. Following the operation, the targeted events no
longer exist in the source segment.
If data already exist at the destination side, the extracted data
and existing data are mixed.
1. Source phrase
The upper Phrs setting selects the phrase from which
events are to be extracted.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Source segment (M001:1:000~M257:1:000)
Select the phrase segment for the extraction.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
3. Destination phrase
The lower Phrs setting selects the destination phrase.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
4. Event
Select the event type
the screen).
■ Settings : Note
PC
PB
CC
CAT
PAT
EXC
to be extracted (at the center of
Note events
Program change
Pitch bend
Control change (Any single
control-change message type
000 to 127, or all controlchange messages)
Channel aftertouch
Polyphonic aftertouch
System exclusive
12. Job
Job 14 Create Continuous Data
2
5
3
7
6
8
8. Curve
Specifies the degree of positive or negative “curvature”
that will be applied to the continuous data. “+00” produces a linear curve. Positive values create an increasingly positive curve (i.e. upward curve). and negative
values produce an increasingly negative curve (i.e.
downward curve).
■ Settings : -16 ... +16
4
Creates continuous control change data over the range of the
specified segment. This can be useful for inserting precise
pitch bends and other control variations.
Job 15 Thin Out
1
2
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Sets the phrase to which adjustment is applied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase over which adjustment is
carried out. The first segment sets the measure, beat,
and clock for the start point; the second segment sets
the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 999:8:479
3. Event Type
Selects the event type to be created (at the center of the
screen).
■ Settings : PB (Pitch bend), CC (Control
change), CAT (Channel aftertouch),
EXC (System exclusive)
4. Control Change No.
When “CC” is selected the cursor can be moved to the
control change number to specify the type of the control change data to be created.
■ Settings : 000 ... 127
5. Times
This multiplier specifies the number of times the data
created within the specified segment is to be repeated.
■ Settings : 01 ... 99
6. Data
Specifies the lower and upper limits for the data to be
created. The left value is the low limit, and the right
value is the upper limit.
■ Settings : 000 ... 127, -8192 ... +8191 (Event
Type=PB)
3
You use this job to remove some occurrences of a specified
non-note event within the designated segment of a selected
track. The purpose is to reduce the data volume and free up
additional memory.
Specifically, the job will remove every other occurrence of
the event in areas where the event recurs within 60 clock cycles. The job will not remove an event that is separated from
the previous occurrence by at least 60 clock cycles.
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Selects the target phrase.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase to be thinned. The first segment sets the measure, beat, and clock for the start point;
the second segment sets the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
3. Event type
Selects the targeted event type.
■ Settings : PB (Pitch bend), CC (Any single Control Change message type, 000 to
127), CAT (Channel aftertouch), PAT
(Polyphonic aftertouch)
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
91
PATTERN MODE
1
7. Clock
Specifies the number of clocks between each created
event to be inserted.
■ Settings : 001 ... 999
12. Job
Job 16 Modify Control Data
1
Job 17 Time Stretch
2
5
1
4
PATTERN MODE
6
3
Changes or offsets the values of all occurences of the specified type of control change data of the specified segment.
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Selects the target phrase.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the area of the phrase to be modified. The first
segment sets the measure, beat, and clock for the start
point; the second segment sets the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat : clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
3. Event Type
Selects the event type to be adjusted (at the center of
the screen).
■ Settings : PB (Pitch bend), CC (Any single Control Change message type, 000 to
127), CAT (Channel aftertouch), PAT
(Polyphonic aftertouch)
4. Set All
Specifies a fixed value to which all occurences of the
specified type of control change data will be set. Set
this parameter “OFF” if you want to offset the values
of the data using the Rate and Offset parameters, below.
■ Settings : OFF, 000 ... 127, -8192 ... +8191
(Event Type=PB)
5. Rate
Sets the ratio between the lower and higher control
change values. A setting of “100%” maintains the original relationship between the control values, lower settings produce a narrower range, and higher values produce a wider range.
■ Settings : 000 ... 200
6. Offset
Determines the amount of offset applied to the control
change values. “-” settings reduce the values while “+”
settings increase the values.
New Control Change Values
= Original Control Change Values x rate/100
+ offset
(If the right side of the equation is less than 0, the
new value becomes 1)
■ Settings : -127 ... 127, -8192 ... +8191 (Event Type=PB)
92
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
2
3
This job expands or compresses the timing over the selected
segment on the selected phrase.
The operation affects all event timing, note step times, and
note gate times.
1. Phrase setting: Phrs
Selects the target phrase.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2. Segment (M001:1:000 ~ M257: 1:000)
Sets the target area of the phrase. The first segment sets
the measure, beat, and clock for the start point; the second segment sets the end point.
■ Settings : Measure: beat: clock
001:1:000 ... 257:1:000
3. Time
The Time parameter sets the time multiplier.
■ Settings : 025% ... 400%
❏ Phrase
Job 18 Copy Phrase
1
2
3
4
This job copies a selected phrase (either user phrase or preset
phrase) to the designated user phrase.
The source-side Style parameter is meaningful only if you are
copying from a user phrase.
If the destination phrase does not yet exist, this job will create
it. If it does exist, the job will delete its original data.
1. Source style
The upper Style value selects the style containing the
user phrase to be copied. The value is meaningful only
if you are copying a user phrase; the RM1x ignores the
setting if you are copying a preset phrase.
■ Settings : U01 ... U50 P01 .... P60
12. Job
3. Destination style
The lower Style value selects the style that will contain
the destination phrase.
■ Settings : U01 ... U50
4. Destination phrase
The lower Phrase value selects the destination phrase
(user phrase).
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
2
1. Style
Specifies the first style containing the phrase data to be
exchanged.
■ Settings : U01 ... U50
2. Phrase
Specifies the first phrase containing the data to be exchanged.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
3. Style
Specifies the second style containing the phrase data to
be exchanged.
■ Settings : U01 ... U50
4. Phrase
Specifies the second phrase containing the data to be
exchanged.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
Job 20 Mix Phrase
2
a
b
b
3
2. Source phrase (Phrase “a”)
The first Phrase value selects the source phrase. This is
the phrase containing the data to be mixed into the destination phrase. Following the mix, the content of the
source phrase remains unchanged.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
4. Destination phrase (Phrase “b”)
The second Phrase value selects the destination phrase.
The original content of this phrase becomes mixed with
the content from phrase “a”.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
3
4
Exchanges the contents of two specified phrases.
1
1. Source style (Style “a”)
The first Style value selects the style containing the
source phrase (phrase “a”).
■ Settings : U01 ... U50
3. Destination style (Style “b”)
The second Style value selects the style containing the
destination phrase (phrase “b”).
■ Settings : U01 ... U50
Job 19 Exchange Phrase
1
This job mixes all data from two selected user phrases into
the second of these phrases.
Job 21 Append Phrase
1
2
b
a
a
3
4
This job attaches the content of a selected user phrase (phrase
“a”) onto the end of another user phrase (phrase “b”). After
completion of the job, phrase “a” remains unchanged.
If you attempt to append data such that phrase “b” would become longer than 256 measures (the maximum phrase length),
the RM1x returns the “Illegal Input” message and the job does
not execute.
1. Source style (Style “a”)
The upper Style value selects the style containing the
source user phrase (phrase “a”).
■ Settings : U01 ... U50
2. Source phrase (Phrase “a”)
The upper Phrase value selects the source phrase (user
phrase). Following job execution, the content of the
source phrase remains unchanged.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
4
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
93
PATTERN MODE
2. Source phrase
The upper Phrase value selects the phrase to be copied.
■ Settings : Any preset phrase, or user phrase
001 to 256
12. Job
3. Destination style (Style “b”)
The lower Style value selects the style containing the
destination phrase (phrase “b”).
■ Settings : U01 ... U50
4. Destination phrase (Phrase “b”)
The lower Phrase value selects the phrase to which the
source phrase is attached.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
PATTERN MODE
Job 22 Split Phrase
1
2
3
4
5
6
This job splits a selected user phrase into two user phrases.
The job splits the phrase at the first beat of the specified measure. The initial portion of the phrase (up to the split) remains
in its original location, while the remainder of the phrase moves
into the specified destination.
The job overwrites any data already existing in the destination phrase.
1. Source style
The upper Style value selects the style containing the
user phrase to be split.
■ Settings : U01 ... U50
2. Source phrase
The upper Phrase value selects the user phrase to be
style.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
3. Split time signature
Sets the time signature of the destination stiley
■ Settings : 1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4
4. Split point
The “M” value selects the measure at which the phrase
is split. This becomes the start point of the destination
phrase.
■ Settings : 001 ... source-phrase length
5. Destination style
The lower Style value selects the destination style.
■ Settings : OFF, U01 ... U50
6. Destination phrase
The lower Phrase value selects the split destination.
■ Settings : OFF, 001 ... 256
94
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Job 23 Get Phrase
1
2
3
4
This job creates a user phrase from a specified segment of
song data. Specifically, it copies a segment of sequence-track
data from a song into the designated destination phrase.
The RM1x sets the time signature (meter) for the new phrase
equal to the meter recorded in the initial measure of the source
segment. (Note that meter value applies to the entire phrase.
Any meter changes that occur within subsequent measures of
the source segment are ignored.)
Maximum phrase length is 256 measures. If you attempt to
copy a segment that is longer than 256 measures, the screen
returns the “Illegal Input” message and the job does not execute.
The job overwrites any data already existing in the destination phrase.
The job does not copy voice and tempo settings.
1. Source song
The Song value selects the song containing the source
data.
■ Settings : 01 ... 20
2. Source track
The Track value selects the sequence track containing
the source data.
■ Settings : 01 ... 16
3. Segment
The “M” values select the source segment, by its location (in measures) on the source track. The first value
gives the initial measure; the second value gives the final measure.
■ Settings : Initial measure:
001 ... 999
Final measure:
001 ... 999
(where final measure - initial measure ≤ 256, and final measure ≥ initial
measure)
4. Destination phrase
The Phrase value sets the phrase number for the destination user phrase.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
12. Job
Job 24 Put Phrase
Job 26 Phrase Name
4
3
2
This job copies a selected user phrase into a specified area of
a selected song. Any data previously existing in the destination area is erased.
You select the source phrase by its style and phrase numbers.
You select the destination by song number, track number (sequence track), and measure number (location on track).
You use this job to set or change the name for a (non-empty)
user phrase. The name can be up to 8 characters long.
Use Display Knobs 1 and 2 to select a character location and
character, then press the F2 function button (Enter) to enter
the specified character at the selected location. The F1 function button (Delete) can be used to back up one character location and delete the character at that location. Repeat until
the phrase name is complete.
The job does not copy meter, voice, or tempo settings. The
phrase’s meter (time signature) has no effect on the copy.
1. Source phrase (Category, Number )
The Phrase value selects the phrase to be copied.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
❏ Track
Job 27 Copy Track
1
2. Destination song
The Song value selects the destination song.
■ Settings : 01 ... 20
3. Destination track
The Track value selects the sequence track onto which
the phrase is to be copied.
■ Settings : 01 ... 16
4. Track location
The “M” value selects the starting measure, on the sequence track, for the copy.
■ Settings : 001 ... 999
Job 25 Clear Phrase
2 3
This job copies all data (of the selected type) from selected
source track to selected destination track. You can copy track
data from a single section of a selected style.
The copy operation overwrites any data previously existing
on the destination track.
1. Source style, section, and track
The first three settings select the source track.
■ Settings : Style
U01 ... U50
Section
A ... P
Track
1 ... 16
1
2. Destination style, section, and track
The second group of settings selects the destination
track.
■ Settings : Style
U01 ... U50
Section
A ... P
Track
1 ... 16
This job deletes all data from the selected user phrase, and
reinitializes the phrase table.
1. Phrase
The Phrase value selects the user phrase to be deleted.
■ Settings : 001 ... 256
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
95
PATTERN MODE
1
12. Job
3. Data type
These check boxes determine the type(s) of data to be
copied. Move the cursor to a check box and use the
[YES +1] button to turn the check mark on if you want
the corresponding type of data to be copied, or use the
[NO -1] button to turn the check mark off if you don't
want the corresponding type of data to be copied.
■ Settings :
PATTERN MODE
Copy the corresponding data
type.
Do not copy this data type.
Job 28 Exchange Track
1
2 3
Exchanges the specified type of data between two specified
tracks.
1. Track
Specifies the first of the two tracks between which data
will be exchanged.
2. Track
Specifies the second of the two tracks between which
data will be exchanged.
3. Data type
These check boxes determine the type(s) of data to be
exchanged between the specified tracks. Move the cursor to a check box and use the [YES +1] button to turn
the check mark on if you want the corresponding type
of data to be exchanged, or use the [NO -1] button to
turn the check mark off if you don't want the corresponding type of data to be exchanged.
■ Settings :
Exchange the corresponding
data type.
Do not exchange this data type.
Job 29 Clear Track
1
2
3
This job deletes all data (of the selected type) from the selected pattern track, or from all pattern tracks.
1. Section
The Sec setting selects the section to be cleared.
■ Settings : A ... P
2. Track
The TR setting selects the track to be cleared.
■ Settings : 01 ... 16
3. Data type
These check boxes determine the type(s) of data to be
deleted. Move the cursor to a check box and use the
[YES +1] button to turn the check mark on if you want
the corresponding type of data to be deleted, or use the
[NO -1] button to turn the check mark off if you don't
want the corresponding type of data to be deleted.
■ Settings :
Delete the corresponding data
type.
Do not delete this data type.
Job 30 Normalize Play Effect
1
This job rewrites the data in the selected sequence track so
that the new data incorporates the current Play Fx/Groove/
MIDI Delay settings (pages 57, 55, 60). In other words, the
external Play Fx/Groove/MIDI Delay values are internalized
into the track’s MIDI event data.
After rewriting the track’s sequence data, the job reinitializes
the track’s play-effect parameters.
1. Track
The TR value selects the track to be normalized.
■ Settings : 01 ... 16
Normalize the corresponding sequence
track.
All
Normalize all sequence
tracks.
96
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
12. Job
Job 31 Divide Drum Track
1
(And if you change an “ALL” setting to a number or
letter, the RM1x automatically deselects the “ALL” setting at the source side.)
■ Settings : Style
U01 ... U50
Section A ... P, ALL
Separates the note events in a specified track and places the
notes corresponding to different drum instruments in separate
tracks (tracks 1 through 8). If the source track is a track between 1 and 8 the data in that track will be overwritten. Data
other than note events will be copied to all 8 tracks. By separating the drum instruments in this way it becomes possible to
edit then or apply effects individually, as well as apply realtime
control to individual drum instruments during playback.
1. Track
Specifies the source track to be divided.
■ Settings : 01 ... 16
❏ Pattern
Job 32 Copy Pattern
1
2
3
This job copies all data from a selected source style to a selected destination style. You can copy track data from a single
section of a selected style, or from all sections of the style.
The copy operation overwrites any data previously existing
on the destination style.
1. Source style, section
The first group of settings selects the source style and
section(s).
If you set Sec to “ALL”, the RM1x automatically sets
the corresponding destination value to “ALL”. (If you
change an “ALL” setting to a number or letter, the RM1x
automatically deselects the “ALL” setting at the destination side.)
■ Settings : Style
U01 ... U50
Section A ... P, ALL
PATTERN MODE
3. Preset phrase → User
Check this box if you want to copy a preset phrase to a
user phrase.
Job 33 Append Pattern
1
2
3
This job attaches a copy of the selected user pattern (pattern
“a”) onto the end of another user pattern (pattern “b”). After
completion of the job, the original pattern “a” remains unchanged.
If you attempt to append data such that pattern “b” would
become longer than 256 measures, the RM1x returns the “Illegal Input” message and the job does not execute.
1. Source pattern (pattern “a”)
The upper Style and Section settings select the source
pattern.
■ Settings : Style
U01 ... U50
Section A ... P
2. Destination pattern (pattern “b”)
The lower Style and Section settings select the pattern
to which the source pattern is attached.
■ Settings : Style
U01 ... U50
Section A ... P
3. Keep Original Phrase
Check this box if you do not want to alter the original
phrase data.
2. Destination style, section
The second group of settings selects the destination style
and section(s).
Again, if you set Section to “ALL”, the RM1x automatically sets the corresponding source value to “ALL”.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
97
12. Job
Job 35 Clear Pattern
Job 34 Split Pattern
1
2
PATTERN MODE
3
4
This job splits a selected pattern into two patterns.
The job splits the pattern at the first beat of the specified measure. The initial portion of the pattern (up to the split point)
remains in its original location, while the portion starting after the split point is moved and becomes the destination pattern. (If no phrases start after the split point, the destination
pattern becomes empty.)
The job overwrites any data already existing in the destination pattern.
1. Source style, section
The upper Style and Section settings select the pattern
to be split.
■ Settings : Style
U01 ... U50
Section A ... P
2. Split point
The “M” value selects the measure at which the pattern
is split. This becomes the start point of the destination
phrase.
■ Settings : 001 ... source-pattern length
3. Destination style, section
The lower Style and Section settings select the new location for the portion of the pattern that begins at the
split point.
■ Settings : Style
U01 ... U50
Section A ... P
1
This job deletes all data from the selected pattern(s).
If you set Style to “ALL”, the job executes a total deletion removing all sections of all styles. In this case, the job also
reinitializes all play-effect and pattern-voice settings for all
styles.
Note that it is not possible to Undo a total deletion. Be sure
that you really want to delete all patterns before executing a
Style=ALL deletion.
If you set Style to a numerical value and set Section to “ALL”,
the job deletes all sections (all patterns) within the selected
style. It also reinitializes all play-effect and pattern-voice settings for that style. (If you make an error with this type of
deletion, however, you can recover by running an Undo.)
1. Style and section
The style and section values select the pattern(s) to be
deleted.
If you set Style to “ALL”, then Section is also forced to
“ALL”.
■ Settings : Style
U01 ... U50, ALL
Section A ... P, ALL
Job 36 Style Name
4. Keep Original Phrase
Check this box if you do not want to alter the original
phrase data.
You use this job to set or change the style name.
Maximum length for these names is 8 characters.
Use display knobs 1 and 2 to select a character location and
character, then press the F2 function button (Enter) to enter
the specified character at the selected location. The F1 function button (Delete) can be used to back up one character location and delete the character at that location. Repeat until
the style name is complete.
98
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
13. Edit
13. Edit
You use the Pattern EDIT submode to edit the contents of a user phrase. You can adjust or delete any of the MIDI events that
constitute the phrase, and you can add new events.
The RM1x offers two different editing screens: an Event list and a View Filter display.
The event list presents a listing of the track’s MIDI events, in order of their occurrence. Each entry shows an event’s location
in time, its name, and its numerical arguments. You are free to adjust the location or any of the argument values. You can delete
any of the events, or insert new ones.
When you record a performance onto a sequence track, you are recording it as a series of MIDI events. Each event corresponds to
a specific MIDI action. The striking of a note is a “note event”, the switching of a voice is a “program change event”, and so on.
Most event specifications must include information indicating how the event is to be carried out. A note-event specification, for
example, must identify the note (the note name), the note’s time span (the gate time), and the note’s force (the velocity).
The first item on the event list is Top, while the last item is End. These items are for marking purposes only; they do not
represent events, and they cannot be edited.
Beat
Clock
Measure
Parameter
Pointer
Delete
Insert
Measure
001 ... 999
Values
Beat
Clock
1 ... 16
000 ... 479
Function
Moves the pointer to individual events.
Deletes the event at the current pointer location.
Inserts a specified event at the current pointer location.
The number of the measure in which the corresponding event is
located.
The number of the beat at which the corresponding event is located.
The number of the clock at which the corresponding event is located.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
Parameter
Event type
DO!
Values
Note, PB, PC, CC, CAT, PAT,
RPN, NRPN, Exc, XG RPN,
XG NRPN, XG Exc System,
XG Exc Effect, XG Exc Multi,
XG Exc Drum
Function
Specifies the type of event to be inserted.
Actually inserts the specified event at the current pointer location.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
99
PATTERN MODE
❏ Edit
13.Edit
PATTERN MODE
Editing Existing Events
To edit the data in the edit display, use Display Knob 1
(POINTER) or the vertical cursor buttons to move the pointer
to an event you want to edit, use the lateral cursor buttons to
move the cursor to the data item you want to edit, then edit as
required via either the [NO -1] and [YES +1] buttons or keyboard (the keyboard can be used for note entry as well as numeric entry as described on page 26). The edited event will
flash on the display. Press the F4 function button (DO!) to
actually enter the edited data (the event will stop flashing). To
abort an edit simply move the pointer to a new event location
without pressing the F4 (DO!) function button.
Inserting Events
To insert an event use Display Knob 1 (POINTER) or the vertical cursor buttons to move the pointer to an event which is at
the location at which you want to insert the new event, and
press the F3 function button (Insert). The EDIT Insert display
will appear. Use Display Knob 1 to select the type of event
you want to insert. Then use the cursor buttons to move to
data items within the even shown on the display and edit as
required. The precise insert location can also be specified in
this way. The types of events available for insertion are listed
below. When the desired event has been specified, press the
F4 function button (DO!) to actually insert the event, or the
[EXIT] button to abort and return to the main editing display.
Please note that values for “Exc” events (system exclusive)
must be entered in hexadecimal format.
[Event type list]
Event type
Note (Note number)
Function
These messages convey keyboard performance data. Each message includes a
specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, a velocity, and a
gate time.
PB (Pitch Bend)
This message conveys movements of the PITCH BEND Knob
PC (Program Change)
This message is used to select voices.
Refer to the separate List Book for a complete listing of the RM1x voices.
CC (Control Change)
These messages control volume or pan etc.
Each controller has its own control number
CAT (Channel aftertouch)
This message conveys the pressure which is applied to the keyboard after playing a
note in order to create tonal changes (for an entire MIDI channel)
PAT (Polyphonic aftertouch)
This message conveys the pressure that is applied to the keyboard after playing a note
(for individual note numbers)
RPN (Registered Parameter Number)
This message is used to specify part parameters such as Pitch Bend
Sensitivity or Tuning etc
NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)
This message is used to set sound parameters such as vibrato or detune, etc.
Exc (System Exclusive)
A type of MIDI message used to exchange data unique to a specific model or type of
device.
XG RPN (XG Registered Parameter Number)
RPN data using an XG parameter name
XG NRPN (XG Non Regitered Parameter Number) NRPN data using an XG parameter name
XG Exc System (XG System Exclusive)
System Exclusive (XG System) message using an XG parameter name.
XG Exc Effect (XG Effect System Exclusive)
System Exclusive (XG Effect) message using an XG parameter name.
XG Exc Multi (XG Multi part System Exclusive)
System Exclusive (XG Multi part) message using an XG parameter name.
XG Exc Drum (XG Drum setup System Exclusive) System Exclusive (XG Drum setup) message using an XG parameter name.
n
• Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” section of the separate
List Book for details.
• XG is a tone generator format developed by Yamaha which
expands the GM specification to provide the richer expressiveness and upward data compatibility that is demanded
by today’s more sophisticated computer peripheral environment.
100
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
13. Edit
Editable Event Parameters
The parameters and value ranges for editable items are listed below. For each type of event the main edit display is shown on
the left while the corresponding insert edit display is shown on the right.
Note
C-2 ... G8
Gate
00 : 001 ... 99 : 479
Velocity
001 ... 127
Bank Select MSB
000 ... 127
Bank Select LSB
000 ... 127
PC#
000 ... 127
Ctrl#
000 ... 127
Data
000 ... 127
PATTERN MODE
1) Note
2) Pitch Bend
Data
-8192 ... +8191
3) Program change
4) Control Change
5) Channel aftertouch
Data
000 ... 127
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
101
13. Edit
6) Polyphonic aftertouch
PATTERN MODE
Note
C-2 ... G8
Data
000 ... 127
7) RPN
Parameter
Display
PB Sens
FnTune
CsTune
Null
Data
Name
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
Fine tune
Coarse tune
Null
MSB
000
000
000
127
LSB
000
001
002
127
8) NRPN
MSB
000 ... 127
LSB
000 ... 127
Data
000 ... 127
9) Exclusive
Data (Hex) needs to be entered using hexadecimal values.
Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” section of the separate List Book for details.
102
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
000 ... 127, ***
-64 ... .+63, ***
-64 ... .+63, ***
***
13. Edit
10) XG RPN
Name
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
Fine tune
Coarse tune
Null
MSB
000
000
000
127
LSB
000
001
002
127
Data
Parameter
Display
VibRte
VibDpt
VibDly
Cutoff
Resonan
AtckTm
DcayTm
RlseTm
DrCut
DrReso
DrAtRt
DrDcRt
DrPtCs
DrPtFn
DrLevl
DrPan
DrRev
DrCho
DrVar
Name
Vibrato rate
Vibrato depth
Vibrato delay
Filter Cutoff Frequency
Filter Resonance
EG Attack time
EG Decay time
EG Release time
Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency
Drum Filter Resonance
Drum EG Attack Rate
Drum EG Decay Rate
Drum Pitch Coarse
Drum Pitch Fine
Drum Level
Drum Pan
Drum Reverb Send Level
Drum Chorus Send Level
Drum Variation Send Level
MSB
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
028
029
030
031
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
Display
PB Sens
FnTune
CsTune
Null
000 ... 127, ***
-64 ... .+63, ***
-64 ... .+63, ***
***
11) XG NRPN
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Data
LSB
008
009
010
032
033
099
100
102
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
Note (C-2 ...
G8 )
G8 )
G8 )
G8 )
G8 )
G8 )
G8 )
G8 )
G8 )
G8 )
G8 )
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
000 ... 127, ***
* Not supported by the tone generator block.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
103
13. Edit
12) XG system exclusive (system)
PATTERN MODE
*
*
Parameter
M.Tune (Master Tune)
M.Vol (Master Volume)
M.Attn (Master Att
Trans (Transpose)
DrRset (Drum Setup Reset)
XG On (XG system on)
PmRset (All Parameter Reset)
GM On
Data
-102.4 ... +102.3
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
-64 ... +63
Dr1 ... Dr9
-
* Not supported by the tone generator block.
13) XG system exclusive (effect)
104
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Parameter
Display
RevTyp
Name
Reverb Type
Data
RevP1
•
•
RevP10
RevRtn
RevPan
RevP11
•
•
RevP16
ChoType
Reverb Parameter 1
•
•
Reverb Parameter 10
Reverb Return
Reverb Pan
Reverb Parameter 11
•
•
Reverb Parameter 16
Chorus Type
ChoP1
•
•
ChoP10
ChoRtn
ChoPan
ChToRv
ChoP11
•
•
ChoP16
VarTyp
Chorus Parameter 1
•
•
Chorus Parameter 10
Chorus Return
Chorus Pan
Send Chorus to Reverb
Chorus Parameter 11
•
•
Chorus Parameter 16
Variation Type
VarP1
•
•
VarP10
VarRtn
VarPan
Variation Parameter 1
•
•
Variation Parameter 10
Variation Return
Variation Pan
Refer to the “Effect Parameter List” section of the
separate List Book for details.
000 ... 127
L64 ... C ... R63
Refer to the “Effect Parameter List” section of the
separate List Book for details.
000 ... 127
L64 ... C ... R63
000 ... 127
Refer to the “Effect Parameter List” section of the
separate List Book for details.
000 ... 127
L64 ... C ... R63
13. Edit
Send Variation to Reverb
Send Variation to Chorus
Variation Connection
Variation Part
MW Variation Control Depth
Bend Variation Control Depth
CAT Variation Control Depth
AC1 Variation Control Depth
AC2 Variation Control Depth
Variation Parameter 11
•
•
Variation Parameter 16
Data
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
INS, SYS
000 ... 127
-64 ... +63
-64 ... +63
-64 ... +63
-64 ... +63
-64 ... +63
Refer to the “Effect Parameter List” section of the
separate List Book for details.
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
VrToRv
VrToCh
VrCnct
VrPart
MWVar
BndVar
CATVar
AC1Var
AC2Var
VarP11
•
•
VarP16
14) XG system exclusive (multi)
*
*
*
Parameter
Display
ElRsrv
Bank-M
Bank-L
Pgm#
RcvCh.
M/P
KOnAsn
PtMode
NtShft
Detune
Vol
VelDep
VelOfs
Pan
NLim-L
NLim-H
DryLvl
ChoSnd
RevSnd
VarSnd
VibRte
VibDep
VibDly
Cutoff
Resnan
Attack
Decay
Relese
MWP-Cn
MWF-Cn
MWA-Cn
MWP-Dp
MWF-Dp
Part
Name
Element Reserve
Bank Select MSB
Bank Select LSB
Program Number
Receive Channel
Mono / Poly
Same Note Number
Key On Assign
Part Mode
Note Shift
Detune
Volume
Velocity Sens Depth
Velocity Sens Offset
Pan
Note Limit Low
Note Limit High
Dry Level
Chorus Send
Reverb Send
Variation Send
Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
Filter Cutoff Frequency
Filter Resonance
EG Attack Time
EG Decay Time
EG Release Time
MW Pitch Control
MW Filter Control
MW Amplitude Control
MW LFO Pitch
Modulation Depth
MW LFO Filter
Modulation Depth
Data
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
001 ... 128
001 ... 127, OFF
POLY, MONO
SNGL, MULT, INST
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
NORM, DRUM, DrS1 ... DrS9
-64 ... +63
-12.8 ... +12.7
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
Rnd(Random), L63 ... C ... R63
C-2 ... G8
C-2 ... G8
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-9600 ... 0 ... +9450
-64 ... 0 ... +63
000 ... 127
PT01 ... PT99
000 ... 127
* Not supported by the tone generator block.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
105
13. Edit
PATTERN MODE
*
*
Parameter
Display Name
MWA-Dp MW LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth
Bnp-Cn
Bend Pitch Control
BnF-Cn
Bend Filter Control
BnA-Cn Bend Amplitude Control
BnP-Dp Bend LFO Pitch
Modulation Depth
BnF-Dp
Bend LFO Filter
Modulation Depth
BnA-Dp Bend LFO Amplitude
Modulation Depth
CATP-C CAT Pitch Control (Handled as LFO Pitch Depth by the tone generator block.)
CATF-C CAT Filter Control (Handled as LFO Filter Depth by the tone generator block.)
CATA-C CAT Amplitude Control (Handled as LFO Amp Depth by the tone generator block.)
CATP-D CAT LFO Pitch
Modulation Depth
CATF-D CAT LFO Filter
Modulation Depth
CATA-D CAT LFO Amplitude
Modulation Depth
PortSw
Portament Switch
PortTm
Portament Time
PEGInt
Pitch EG Initial Level
PEGAtk Pitch EG Attack Time
PEGRLv Pitch EG Release Level
PEGRtm Pitch EG Release Time
VelLmL
Velocity Limit Low
VelLmH Velocity Limit High
Part
Data
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
000 ... 127
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-9600 ... 0 ... +9450
-64 ... 0 ... +63
000 ... 127
PT01 ... PT99
000 ... 127
PT01 ... PT99
000 ... 127
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
-64, ... 0 ... +63
-9600 ... 0 ... +9450
-64, ... 0 ... +63
000 ... 127
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT01 ... PT99
000 ... 127
PT01 ... PT99
000 ... 127
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
PT01 ...
OFF, ON
000 ... 127
-64, ... 0 ... +63
-64, ... 0 ... +63
-64, ... 0 ... +63
-64, ... 0 ... +63
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
PT99
* Not supported by the tone generator block.
15) XG system exclusive (drum)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Parameter
Display
DrPcCs
DrPcFn
DrLevl
DrAltG
DrPan
DrRev
DrCho
DrVar
DrKyAs
DrNtOf
DrNtOn
DrCut
DrResn
DrAttk
DrDcy1
DrDcy2
Set
Name
Drum Pitch Coarse
Drum Pitch Fine
Drum Level
Drum Alternate Group
Drum Pan
Drum Reverb Send
Drum Chorus Send
Drum Variation Send
Drum Key Assign
Drum Receive Note Off
Drum Receive Note On
Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency
Drum Filter Resonance
Drum EG Attack Time
Drum EG Decay 1 Time
Drum EG Decay 2 Time
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
Dr1 ...
* Not supported by the tone generator block.
106
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Note
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
Dr9
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
C-2 ...
Data
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
G8
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
000 ... 127
OFF, 001 ... 127
Rnd, L63 ... C ... R63
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
000 ... 127
SNGL, MULT
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
-64 ... 0 ... +63
13. Edit
❏ View Filter
The RM1x’s “View Filter” lets you select the event types that appear on the editing screens. To select an event for display,
place a checkmark in the box next to the event name. To filter out an event type (so that it does not appear on the list), remove
the checkmark so that the box is empty.
As an example, assume that you want to work on note events only. In this case, you will probably want to filter out all other
event types from the event list - since this will make the list easier to follow, and will protect against accidental changes to
other events. To set the filter to block out all non-note events, remove checkmarks from all boxes other than the Note box.
You can remove all checkmarks at once by pressing the F3 button (ClearAll). To set checkmarks into all boxes, press the F4
button (Set All).
Parameter
Control Number
Clear All
Set All
Values
000 ... 119, ALL
Function
Specifies Control Change number.
Removes all checkmarks at once.
Sets checkmarks into all boxes.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
107
PATTERN MODE
Under the default setup all event types are shown, and the View Filter mark
does not appear. If you choose to filter out
one or more event types, the View Filter mark
appears at the top of the editing screens to remind you that the filter is on.
14. Split
14. Split
❏ Split
This function allows a specified range of measures to be copied from the current section (pattern) to a specified section in a
specified user style.
Track number
Transpose
PATTERN MODE
Parameter
Start measure
End measure
Style number
Section
DO!
001 ... 256
001 ... 256
U01 ... U50
A ... P
-
Values
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... +36
Measure
001 ... 256
Function
Specifies the first measure in the range to be copied.
Specifies the last measure in the range to be copied.
Specifies the destination style number.
Specifies the destination section.
Press the F4 function button to actually cut and copy the specified
pattern data to the specified style and section.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
Sets playback start location; or shows current playback location.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
After specifying the start and end measures of the range of
pattern data you want to copy from the current style and section, and after specifying the destination style and section,
press the F4 function key (DO!). “Executing” will appear on
the display briefly while the data is being copied.
The SPLIT function makes the process of splitting a section
into multiple sections of the same length fast and easy. After
108
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
the first SPLIT operation the START MEAS and END MEAS
parameters will automatically be set in preparation to copy
the next range of measures: START MEAS will be set to the
previous END MEAS + 1, and END MEAS will be set to
specify a measure range of the same length as the preceding
range copied.
PATTERN CHAIN MODE
Chapter 3. PATTERN CHAIN MODE
The PATTERN CHAIN mode makes it possible to specify a sequence of
patterns to be played back automatically.
1. PATTERN CHAIN Playback ....................... 110
2. Disk ........................................................ 111
3. Job ......................................................... 112
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
109
1. PATTERN CHAIN Playback
1. PATTERN CHAIN Playback
The main PATTERN CHAIN display can be used to specify and edit the sequence of patterns to be played in the Pattern Chain
mode.
Pattern chain number
PATTERN CHAIN MODE
Parameter
Measure
Time signature
Pattern chain name
Values
Style
OFF, P01 ... P60, END, U01 ... U50
Section
CLEAR!
Pattern chain number/
Pattern chain name
Time Signature
A ... P
01 ... 20
Function
Positions the pointer (on the left side of the display) at the beginning
of any measure within the chain for pattern entry or playback.
Selects the style. “OFF” mutes the corresponding measure (i.e. no
sound is produced), and “END” causes pattern chain playback to
stop at that measure.
Selects the section.
Deletes the style or section at the current cursor location.
Selects one of the 20 available pattern chains.
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4 Specifies the the time signature of the current measure.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
To Create and Play a Chain
1 Select a measure.
Use Display Knob 1 to locate the measure pointer at
the measure you want to insert a pattern (normally
you will start a chain at measure 001). A pattern will
only play up until the next specified pattern. For example, if an 8-measure pattern is specified at measure 001, then the next pattern is specified at measure 005, the first pattern will only play up to measure
004 then the second pattern will begin playing from
measure 005.
2 Enter a pattern at the selected measure.
Use Display Knob 2 to specify a style, and display
knob 4 to specify the section of the style corresponding to the desired pattern. “OFF” and “END” measures can be entered via Display Knob 2. You can also
specify the section via the keyboard as described on
page 28. It is not necessary to re-enter the style and
section for subsequent measures over which you want
the pattern to play. If it is an 8-measure pattern, for
example, and you want it to play for the full 8 measures before the next measure begins, you can leave
the next 7 measures blank and then enter the next
pattern on the following measure.
Specfified styles and sections can be cleared by
moving the pointer to the appropriate measure and
pressing the F4 function button (CLEAR!).
110
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
3 Specify a time signature, if necessary.
Move the cursor to the time signature parameter and
use the [NO -1]/[YES +1] buttons to change the time
signature of the selected measure, if necessary. If
the new time signature setting results in a total number
of beats which are fewer than the corresponding
pattern(s), the excess beats will be truncated to fit
the specified time signature. On the other hand, if the
new time signature setting results in a greater number
of beats than the original pattern, the pattern will be
looped to fill the specified number of beats.
4 Play the chain. Press the PLAY p button to begin
chain playback from the current measure.
2. Disk
2. Disk
❏ Save
❏ Load
❏ Rename
❏ Delete/Format/Information
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
PATTERN CHAIN MODE
Disk functions in the PATTERN CHAIN mode are essentially the same as those in the PATTERN mode, except that only the
“ALL” file type is available. Refer to the PATTERN mode disk functions beginning on page 76.
111
3. Job
3. Job
You use the RM1x’s pattern chain jobs to perform various operations on phrases and patterns.
You select the job from the job menu using the Display Knob 1, 2 or the CURSOR buttons. You can also make your selection
using the F4 button.
Note that the job menu is too large to fit entirely on the screen. But you can scroll through the list using the Display Knob 1, 2
or the CURSOR buttons.
❏ Job List
PATTERN CHAIN MODE
Category
UNDO/REDO
EVENT
EVENT
MEASURE
MEASURE
CONVERT
00
01
02
03
04
05
Values
Undo/Redo
Copy Event
Erase Event
Create Measure
Delete Measure
Convert to Song
CHAIN
CHAIN
CHAIN
06 Copy Chain
07 Clear Chain
08 Chain Name
Parameter
Category
Job
Select
Function
If UNDO: Cancel the last operation. If REDO: Cancel the last UNDO
Copy all events in specified segment to designated destination.
Erase all events over selected segment (and replaces with rests).
Insert empty measures into all tracks.
Delete specified measures from all tracks.
Converts the Pattern Chain data to Song data and places the results in the
normal song tracks after converting the data to standard MIDI format.
Copy data from selected pattern chain into destination pattern chain.
Delete all data from selected pattern chain.
Assign a name to the selected pattern chain.
Values
UNDO/REDO, EVENT,
MEASURE, CONVERT, CHAIN
00 ... 08
See page
113
113
113
113
113
114
114
114
114
Function
Selects the category.
Selects the job.
Jumps to the job currently selected in the job list.
To Select a Job
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 81.
CAUTION !
Do not turn off the power while a job is executing (while the “Executing...” message is on the screen), as this may cause
destruction of your recorded data.
112
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
3. Job
❏ Undo/Redo
❏ Measure
Job 00 Undo/Redo
Job 03 Create Measure
1
Exactly the same as in the PATTERN mode (page 82).
2
3
Job 01 Copy Event
1
3
2
This job copies all data from a specified source area (pattern
chain ) to a specified destination, overwriting any data already existing at the destination.
1. Source segment
The upper “M” values set the segment from which data
are copied.
■ Settings : Measure
001 ... 999
2. Start point of destination segment
The lower “M” value sets the start point for the copy on
the destination phrase.
■ Settings : Measure
001 ... 999
1. Insertion point
The “M” value sets the position for the insertion. Specifically, the value sets the measure number (within the
pattern chain) for the first inserted measure. A value of
001, for example, inserts the measures at the very beginning (so that the first inserted measure becomes
Measure 1).
■ Settings : 001 ... 999
2. Time signature
You can select any time signature that you like. You
may find it convenient to use this parameter when you
need to create a pattern that incorporates meter changes.
■ Settings : 1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4
3. Number of measures to insert
You can set the number of measures to be inserted.
■ Settings : 01 ... 99
Job 04 Delete Measure
1
3. Times
This multiplier specifies the number of times the segment is copied.
■ Settings : 01 ... 99
Job 02 Erase Event
1
This job clears all data from the specified segment of the designated pattern chain, so that the segment becomes silent.
This job removes a segment consisting of one or more measures. The segment is removed from all tracks.
The area that trails the deleted segment shifts forward (toward the start of the pattern chain) to fill in the gap.
1. Range
The “M” values set the segment to be removed. The
first value gives the number of the first measure of the
segment; the second value gives the number of the final
measure.
■ Settings : 001 ... 999
1. Segment (M001 ~ M999)
Sets the area of the pattern chain to be erased.
■ Settings : Measure
001 ... 999
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
113
PATTERN CHAIN MODE
This job inserts one or more empty measures into the same
location on all tracks.
❏ Event
3. Job
Job 07 Clear Chain
❏ Convert
Job 05 Convert to Song
1
1
This job deletes all data from the selected pattern chain.
This job converts the Pattern Chain data to Song data and
places the results in the normal song tracks after converting
the data to standard MIDI format. The expanded data is placed
in song tracks 1 through 16. Any previous data in those tracks
will be erased!
PATTERN CHAIN MODE
1. Song
Specifies the Song number to which the converted data
will be saved.
■ Settings : 01 ... 20
2. Start Measure
Specifies the measure from which the converted data
will start in the destination Song.
■ Settings : 001 ... 999
❏ Chain
Job 06 Copy Chain
1
2
This job copies the selected pattern chain (including PLAY
FX and VOICE submode settings) into another pattern chain
location. Following the copy, the selected pattern chain will
exist at two pattern chain locations.
The copy operation causes loss of any data already existing in
the destination pattern chain.
1. Source pattern chain
The first Chain value selects the Pattern chain to be
copied.
■ Settings : 01 ... 20
2. Destination pattern chain
The second Chain value selects the destination.
■ Settings : 01 ... 20
114
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
1. Chain
Selects the pattern chain to be deleted.
■ Settings : 01 ... 20
Job 08 Chain Name
You use this job to set or change the name for the currently
selected pattern chain.
Use Display Knobs 1 and 2 to select a character location and character, then press the F2 function button
(Enter) to enter the specified character at the selected
location. The F1 function button (Delete) can be used to
back up one character location and delete the character
at that location. Repeat until the chain name is complete.
Chapter 4. SONG MODE
You use SONG mode to play, edit, and record your songs. This chapter
explains all SONG mode operations.
The RM1x’s song memory has room for 20 songs.
Each song can comprise as many as 16 sequence tracks and 1 BPM (tempo) track.
SONG MODE
Playback and recording in the SONG mode is essentially the
same as in the PATTERN mode. Conceptually, the only difference is that the SONG mode is designed for recording and
playing back complete songs, while the PATTERN mode is intended for recording and playing shorter phrases and patterns.
The only functional differences are that the SONG mode allows
setting odd time signatures, punch-in
recording, and multitrack recording
in which all tracks can be recorded
simultaneoulsy(from a external MIDI
sequencer or computer).
1. SONG Playback ...................................... 116
2. Recording ................................................ 117
3. Groove ................................................... 119
4. Play FX .................................................... 119
5. MIDI delay .............................................. 119
6. Arpeggio ................................................ 119
7. Voice ...................................................... 120
8. Voice Edit ................................................ 120
9. Effect ...................................................... 120
10. Setup ...................................................... 121
11. Disk ........................................................ 122
12. Job ......................................................... 123
13. Edit ......................................................... 128
14. Split ........................................................ 129
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
115
1. SONG Playback
1. SONG Playback
Song name
Transpose
Measure
Track status
Track number
Time signature
SONG MODE
Parameter
Song number / name
Jump
U01 ... U20
OFF, 001 ...
Values
Keypad velocity
001 ... 127, RND1 ... RND4
BPM
Track number
25 ... 300
01 ... 16, BPM
Transpose
-36 ... +36
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
Sets playback start location; or shows current playback location.
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ...
16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4
M, S
Sets the song’s time signature.
Measure
Time Signature
Track status
Function
Selects the song.
Specifies the measure the RM1x will “jump” to when the STOP s
button is pressed. When “OFF” the playback locations remains where
it is when playback is stopped.
Specifies the note velocity value for the RM1x keyboard. Higher values produce louder sound.
Sets tempo for song playback.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Indicates track SOLO or track MUTE.
The highlighted track number indicates the currently selected track.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
To select and play a song
1 Make sure the SONG mode is selected (if necessary, press the MODE [SONG] button). “SONG”
should appear in the upper left-hand corner of the
LCD display.
2 Use Display Knob 1 to select a song (01 … 20).
3 Press PLAY p to start playback.
The PLAY p button indicator will flash at the current BPM rate, the velocity bars above active tracks
will indicate playback level in the corresponding tracks,
and the MEAS parameter will indicate the current
measure during playback.
116
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
4 Select tracks via the keyboard as described on page
27, and use the realtime controller knobs to change
parameters as required during playback.
In the SONG mode playback will stop automatically
when the end of the song is reached.
5 Press STOP s if you want to stop playback before
the end of the song.
2. Recording
2. Recording
You use SONG RECORDING mode to record your songs.
You start a recording session from the SONG PLAY screen by pressing the REC button. This puts you into Recording Standby.
You can then select the recording method and set the relevant parameters, before beginning the actual recording.
Refer to the PATTERN mode recording instructions (page 49) for details on recording using the REPLACE, OVERDUB,
STEP, and GRID recording modes. The SONG mode additionally allows PUNCH-IN recording, which will be described
below.
Transpose
Measure
Track status
Track number
Parameter
Track Type
Recording type
Keypad velocity
BPM
Track number
Transpose
Measure
Time Signature
Track status
Values
Single, Multi
Replace (Realtime)
Overdub (Realtime)
Punch In (Realtime)
Step (Step)
Grid (Step)
001 ... 127, RND1 ... RND4
Function
Specifies SINGLE or MULTI-TRACK recording. When SINGLE is
selected only a single track is recorded at a time as in the PATTERN
mode. When MULTI is selected all 16 tracks can be recorded at the
same time via the corresponding MIDI channels. Please note that
only the REPLACE, OVERDUB, and PUNCH-IN recording modes
are available when MULTI is selected.
Selects the recording method.
Specifies the note velocity value for the RM1x keyboard. Higher values produce louder sound.
25 ... 300
Sets tempo for song playback.
01 ... 16
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
-36 ... +36
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
Sets recording start location; or shows current recording location.
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ... 8/4 Sets the song’s time signature.
MUTE, SOLO
Indicates track SOLO or track MUTE.
The highlighted track number indicates the currently selected track.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
117
SONG MODE
Time signature
2. Recording
❏ Realtime Recording (Replace,
Overdub)
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 51.
n
❏ Step Recording
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 52.
n
• When Replace recording is used in the SONG mode, only
the recorded measures will be replaced (the entire track is
replaced in the PATTERN mode).
• BPM data can be recorded to the BPM track in the STEP
record mode in the same way that other control change
data can be recorded to the normal tracks.
❏ Realtime Recording (Punch In)
Punch-in recording is a special type of realtime recording in
which you specify a range of measures you want to record,
leaving all other material on the track intact. This is particularly useful for re-recording a short segment of an otherwise
perfect track — so you don’t have to re-record the entire track.
1 For punch-in recording use Display Knob 2 to select
the PUNCH mode after engaging the record ready
mode (step 6 of the “Preparing To Record” record
process, described on page 49).
2 If necessary select the track you want to record on
via the keyboard as described on page 27.
SONG MODE
3 Specify the “punch-in” and “punch-out” points, the
punch-in point being the measure and beat at which
recording will begin, and the punch-out point being
the measure and beat at which recording will end.
Move the cursor to the punch-in and punch-out measure and beat parameters and set as required. Then,
before actually starting recording, set the measure
parameter a few measures before the punch-in point
so you’ll be ready to record when the punch-in point
is reached.
❏ Step Recording (Grid)
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 54.
4 Start the punch-in operation by pressing the PLAY
p button (there is no count-in when punch-in recording is started). Recording will begin automatically
at the specified punch-in point.
5 Recording will stop, but playback will continue, when
the punch-out point is reached. Press the STOP s
button to stop playback.
Recording the BPM Track
The SONG mode has a BPM track in addition to standard
recording tracks 1 through 16. The BPM track can be used to
record BPM changes which will be reproduced when the song
is played back.
To record BPM data simply select the BPM track for recording, begin recording in the Replace or Punch In mode, and
use display knob 4 to enter the BPM changes as required.
118
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
n
• The GRID record mode cannot be selected if the BPM
track is selected for recording.
3. Groove/4. Play FX/5. MIDI delay/6. Arpeggio
3. Groove
5. MIDI delay
❏ Grid Groove
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 60. The only
difference is that in the SONG mode you will not need to
specify a section since the concept of “sections” only applies
in the PATTERN mode.
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 55.
❏ Delay
4. Play FX
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 57. The only
difference is that in the SONG mode you will not need to
specify a section since the concept of “sections” only applies
in the PATTERN mode.
❏ Feedback
SONG MODE
❏ Harmonize
6. Arpeggio
❏ Play Fx
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 62. The only
difference is that in the SONG mode you will not need to
specify a section since the concept of “sections” only applies
in the PATTERN mode.
❏ Arpeggio Setting
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
119
7. Voice/8. Voice Edit/9. Effect
7. Voice
❏ Pitch Bend/Portamento
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 63. The only
difference is that in the SONG mode you will not need to
specify a section since the concept of “sections” only applies
in the PATTERN mode.
❏ Voice Balance
❏ LFO
❏ Effect Send
❏ Filter
SONG MODE
9. Effect
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 69.
8. Voice Edit
❏ Type
When variation connection = System:
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 65. The only
difference is that in the SONG mode you will not need to
specify a section since the concept of “sections” only applies
in the PATTERN mode.
❏ EG
When variation connection = Insertion:
120
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
9. Effect/10. Setup
❏ Variation edit
page1
❏ Reverb edit
page1
When variation connection = System:
page2
When variation connection = Insertion:
page2
When variation connection = System:
10. Setup
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 73.
SONG MODE
❏ Low Boost
When variation connection = Insertion:
❏ Knob Assign
❏ Chorus edit
page1
❏ Out Channel
page2
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
121
11. Disk
11. Disk
Disk functions in the SONG mode are essentially the same as
those in the PATTERN mode, except that the “PATT” file type
is not available. Refer to the PATTERN mode disk functions
beginning on page 76. Also refer to the “About Floppy Disks”
section on page 42 for additional information.
❏ Save
❏ Load
SONG MODE
❏ Rename
❏ Delete/Format/Information
122
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
12. Job
12. Job
You use the RM1x’s song jobs to perform various operations on the songs that you have recorded.
You select the job from the job menu using the Display Knob 1, 2 or the CURSOR buttons. You can also make your selection
using the F4 button.
Note that the job menu is too large to fit entirely on the screen. But you can scroll through the list using the Display Knob 1, 2
or the CURSOR buttons.
Category
UNDO/REDO
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Values
Undo/Redo
Quantize
Modify Velocity
Modify Gate Time
Crescendo
Transpose
Glide
Create Roll
Chord Sort
Chord Separate
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
10
11
12
13
Shift Clock
Copy Event
Erase Event
Extract Event
EVENT
14 Create Continuous Data
EVENT
EVENT
15 Thin Out
16 Modify Control Data
EVENT
MEASURE
MEASURE
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
TRACK
24 Normalize Play Effect
TRACK
25 Divide Drum Track
SONG
SONG
SONG
26 Copy Song
27 Clear Song
28 Song Name
Time Stretch
Create Measure
Delete Measure
Copy Track
Exchange Track
Mix Track
Clear Track
Function
See page
If UNDO: Cancel the last operation. If REDO: Cancel the last UNDO
124
Quantize note events within selected segment of selected user phrase.
124
Change velocities in selected segment of selected user phrase.
124
Change gate times in selected segment of selected user phrase.
124
Gradually increase/decrease velocity over selected segment.
125
Transpose all notes over selected segment.
125
Produces smooth glides from note to note in the selected segment.
125
Inserts repeated note data in the specified segment to create rapid rolls.
125
Sort each chordal note event (within specified segment) by pitch.
125
Break each chordal note event (within specified segment) into individual notes,
125
separated by designated delay time.
Shift all data (within specified segment) by specified number of clock cycles.
125
Copy all events in specified segment to designated destination.
125
Erase all events over selected segment (and replaces with rests).
126
Move events of specified type from specified segment of one phrase to same
126
segment in another.
Creates the specified type of continuous control change data in the specified
126
segment.
Reduce repetitions of specified event type (within specified segment).
126
Changes of offsets the values of all occurences of the specified type of con126
trol change data with the specified segment.
Expand or compress timing over specified segment.
126
Insert empty measures into all tracks.
126
Delete specified measures from all tracks.
127
Copies the data from one specified track to a second specified track.
127
Exchanges the contents of two specified tracks.
127
Mix one track into another. (Target track can be in a different song.)
127
Delete all data from selected track, cancel voice setting, and reinitialize play
127
effects.
Actually applies the PLAY FX and GRID GROOVE settings to the sequence
127
data, overwriting the existing sequence data.
Separates the note events in a specified track and places the notes corre128
sponding to different drum instruments in separate tracks.
Copy data from selected song into destination song.
128
Delete all data from selected song.
128
Assign a name to the selected song.
128
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
123
SONG MODE
❏ Job List
12. Job
Parameter
Category
Job
Select
Values
UNDO/REDO, NOTE, EVENT,
MEASURE, TRACK, SONG
00 ... 28
Function
Selects the category.
Selects the job.
Jumps to the job currently selected in the job list.
To Select a Job
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 81.
CAUTION !
Do not turn off the power while a job is executing (while the “Executing...” message is on the screen), as this may cause
destruction of your recorded data.
SONG MODE
❏ Undo/Redo
Job 00 Undo/Redo
Job 02 Modify Velocity
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 82.
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 84.
❏ Note
Job 01 Quantize
Job 03 Modify Gate Time
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 82.
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 85.
124
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
12. Job
Job 08 Chord Sort
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 86.
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 88.
Job 05 Transpose
Job 09 Chord Separate
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 87.
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 89.
Job 06 Glide
❏ Event
SONG MODE
Job 04 Crescendo
Job 10 Shift Clock
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 87.
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 89.
Job 07 Create Roll
Job 11 Copy Event
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 88.
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that
TRACKs are selected rather than PHRASEs, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 89.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
125
12. Job
SONG MODE
Job 12 Erase Event
Job 16 Modify Control Data
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 90.
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 92.
Job 13 Extract Event
Job 17 Time Stretch
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACKs are selected rather than PHRASEs, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 90.
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 92.
Job 14 Create Continuous Data
❏ Measure
Job 18 Create Measure
1
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 91.
Job 15 Thin Out
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that a
TRACK is selected rather than a PHRASE, and the selectable
measure range is greater. Refer to page 91.
2
3
This job inserts one or more empty measures into the same
location on all tracks.
1. Insertion point
The “M” value sets the position for the insertion. Specifically, the value sets the measure number (within the
song) for the first inserted measure. A value of 001, for
example, inserts the measures at the very beginning (so
that the first inserted measure becomes Measure 1).
■ Settings :
001 ... 999
n
• If you set the insertion point past the end of the song, the
RM1x will append the empty measure(s) to the end of
Track 1 only.
2. Time Signature
You can select any meter that you like. You may find it
convenient to use this parameter when you need to create a song that incorporates meter changes.
■ Settings :
1/16 ... 16/16; 1/8 ... 16/8; 1/4 ...
8/4
126
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
12. Job
3. Number of measures to insert
■ Settings :
01 ... 99
Job 22 Mix Track
1
a
Job 19 Delete Measure
1
4
This job removes a segment consisting of one or more measures. The segment is removed from all tracks.
The area that trails the deleted segment shifts forward (toward the start of the song) to fill in the gap.
1. Range
The “M” values set the segment to be removed. The
first value gives the number of the first measure of the
segment; the second value gives the number of the final
measure.
■ Settings :
001 ... 999
❏ Track
Job 20 Copy Track
2
This job mixes all data from a selected sequence track onto
another sequence track. The two tracks do not have to be in
the same song.
When the operation is completed, the source track remains
unchanged, while the destination track contains both its original data and a copy of the source track’s data.
1. Source track (Track “a”)
The first TR value selects the source track. This is the
track containing the data to be mixed into the destination track. Following the mix, the source track’s content will remain unchanged.
■ Settings :
01 ... 16
2. Destination track (Track “b”)
The second TR value selects the destination track. The
original content of this track becomes mixed with the
content from Track “a.”
■ Settings :
01 ... 16
Job 23 Clear Track
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that in
the SONG mode you will not need to specify a section and
the data types are different. Refer to page 95.
Job 21 Exchange Track
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that in
the SONG mode you will not need to specify a section and
the data types are different. Refer to page 96.
Job 24 Normalize Play Effect
Essentially the same as in the PATTERN mode except that the
data types are different. Refer to page 96.
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 96.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
127
SONG MODE
4
b
b
12. Job/13. Edit
Job 25 Divide Drum Track
13. Edit
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 99.
❏ Edit
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 97.
❏ Song
Job 26 Copy Song
❏ View Filter
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 97. The only
difference is that in the SONG mode you will not need to
specify a section since the concept of “sections” only applies
in the PATTERN mode.
■ Settings:
Song
U01 ... U20
SONG MODE
Job 27 Clear Song
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 98. The only
difference is that in the SONG mode you will not need to
specify a section since the concept of “sections” only applies
in the PATTERN mode.
■ Settings:
Song
U01 ... U20
Job 28 Song Name
Same as in the PATTERN mode. Refer to page 98.
128
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
14. Song Split (Song to Pattern)
14. Song Split (Song to Pattern)
❏ Split
This function allows a specified range of measures to be copied from the current song to a specified section in a specified user
style.
Transpose
Track number
Parameter
Start measure
End measure
Style number
Section
DO!
001 ... 999
001 ... 999
U01 ... U60
A ... P
Values
Track number
01 ... 16
Transpose
-36 ... +36
Measure
001 ... 999
Function
Specifies the first measure in the range to be copied.
Specifies the last measure in the range to be copied.
Specifies the destination style number.
Specifies the destination section.
Press the F4 function button (DO!) to actually cut and copy the specified song data to the specified style and section.
Shows the current selected track number. Track number selection
can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method
described on page 27.
Shows the current transpose value. Transposition can be accomplished via this parameter, or by the keyboard method described on
page 27.
Sets playback start location; or shows current playback location.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
After specifying the start and end measures of the range
of song data you want to copy, and the destination style
and section, press the F4 function key (DO!). “Executing” will appear on the display briefly while the data is
being copied.
The SPLIT function makes the process of splitting a song
into multiple sections of the same length fast and easy.
After the first SPLIT operation the START MEAS and
END MEAS parameters will automatically be set in
preparation to copy the next range of measures: START
MEAS will be set to the previous END MEAS + 1, and
END MEAS will be set to specify a measure range of
the same length as the preceding range copied.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
129
SONG MODE
Measure
MEMO
SONG MODE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
130
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Chapter 5. UTILITY MODE
UTILITY MODE
This chapter explains Utility mode.
Utility mode is where you can make system settings and MIDI-related
settings.
1. System .................................................... 132
2. MIDI Setup .............................................. 135
3. MIDI filter ................................................ 137
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
131
1. System
1. System
Here you can make settings for system-related parameters, such as Master Tune.
❏ page1
Parameter
Master tune
Values
-102.4 ... 0 ... +102.3
Footswitch
START/STP, SEC, SUS, TAP
Pattern Quantize
1, 1/16
Memory Protect on/off
ON, OFF
Function
Sets the overall tuning of the entire RM1x in 0.1 cent steps.
The pitch of drum voices cannot be adjusted here.
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.
Sets the function of the footswitch connected to the rear panel FOOT
SW connector.
For details, see the list below.
Sets the quantize value for pattern switching during playback. When
set to “1” patterns (sections) will always switch on the first beat of
the measure during playback. When “1/16” is selected patterns (sections) can be switched on any 16th beat during playback.
Turns memory protection on or off. When “ON” no operations which
alter or overwrite the contents of the RM1x memory can be performed (e.g. record or edit or job), preventing accidental changes to
the memory or tampering.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
UTILITY MODE
[Footswitch function list]
START/STP
SEC
SUS
TAP
132
Each time the footswitch is pressed, the song or pattern will alternately start or stop.
Each time the footswitch is pressed, the Section of the pattern will be switched in the order of A - P.
All notes played while the footswitch is held will be sustained until the footswitch is released.
This useful function lets you use the footswitch to tap out the BPM (Tempo) . Simply tap (press/release) the footswitch three
times, and the song or pattern starts automatically at the BPM you tapped. The BPM can also be changed during playback
by tapping the footswitch three times at the desired tempo.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
1. System
❏ page2
Parameter
Click mode
Values
OFF, REC, REC/PLAY, ALL
Click beat
Recording count
16, 08, 04, 02, 01
OFF, 1 Meas, 2 Meas, 3 Meas,
4 Meas, 5 Meas, 6 Meas, 7
Meas, 8 Meas
BPM, MEAS
LED display
Function
Determines when the click feature (metoronome) is used.
“OFF” disables the click feature.
“REC” uses click for realtime recording only.
“REC/PLAY” uses click for realtime recording and playback.
“ALL” always use click.
Sets the click interval.
Sets the number of preliminary measures used as a lead-in for
realtime recording.
Determines whether the BPM display will normally show beats per
minute (BPM) or measure numbers (MEAS).
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
UTILITY MODE
❏ page3
Parameter
Event chase
Edit view
Values
OFF
PC
PC, PB, CTRL
ALL
000 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 300
ms, 400 ms, 500 ms, 600 ms,
700 ms, 800 ms, 900 ms
NORM, RM1x TG
LCD mode
POSI, NEGA
System exclusive interval time
Function
See below.
See below.
Specifies the normal (NORMAL) or RM1x TG edit view mode for
the PATTERN and SONG EDIT modes. When the “RM1x TG mode
is selected the EDIT mode display will conform to the parameters of
the RM1x tone generation block.
Determines whether the LCD display will consist of black characters on a light background (POSI), or light characters on a black
background (NEGA).
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
133
1. System
Event chase
Event Chase is a function that rapidly plays back the specified types of event when a song, pattern, or phrase is played
back from the middle or when it is rewound or fast-forwarded.
This ensures that voice selections and pitch changes etc. will
be correct for the location when playback begins.
If a song or phrase which uses program changes or pitch bend
changes is played back from the middle or is rewound or fastforwarded, the playback may use unexpected voices or the
wrong pitch. Such problems can occur if the section of the
song or phrase that was skipped over contains events such as
program changes or pitch bends.
If the Event Chase function is used, the specified type(s) of
event will be played back at high speed from the beginning
whenever a song or phrase is played back from the middle.
This will mean that a certain length of time may elapse from
the moment the Start command is given until playback actually begins, or that the rewind/fast-forward speed will be
slower.
If Event Chase is set to ALL, large amounts of MIDI data will
be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector, which can cause
MIDI errors to occur on the external MIDI device that is receiving this data.
■ Settings :
OFF
PC
PC, PB, CTRL
ALL
Event Chase will not be performed.
Program Change events.
Program Change, Pitch Bend, and Control
Change events.
All events other than notes.
UTILITY MODE
System exclusive interval time
When system exclusive data (bulk data) recorded in a sequence
track is played back, an interval of the duration specified by
this setting will be inserted between each 1 KB (kilobyte) of
data.
When bulk data that was recorded is re-transmitted to an external MIDI device, limitations of the receiving device’s bulk
data processing power may result in MIDI errors. By setting
an appropriate Interval Time, you can transmit bulk data at a
rate that the receiving device is able to process.
In sequence tracks, each unit of system exclusive data is recorded in a single location of time. However when this data is
played back, the Interval Time function will insert a delay
between each 1 KB of data. The delay is specified in units of
100 ms (1/10 second).
If MIDI errors occur on the receiving device, increase the Interval Time setting and try transmitting the data again.
134
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
2. MIDI Setup
2. MIDI Setup
The MIDI pages let you make MIDI settings for the RM1x.
❏ page1
Values
INTR, MIDI, MTC
MTC Start offset
MIDI control
hours:minutes:seconds:frames
Hours 00 - 23
Minutes 00 - 59
Seconds 00 - 59
Frames 00 - 29
OFF, IN, OUT, IN/OUT
Echo back
OFF, THRU, RecM
Function
Selects whether the RM1x will use its own internal clock or whether
it will use MIDI Clock or MTC messages received from the MIDI IN
connector.
You will need to make this setting when synchronizing the RM1x
with external MIDI devices.
See the MIDI sync setting below.
Specifies the delay from when MIDI Time Code is received until
when the sequencer is started, in hours:minutes: seconds:frames.
When synchronizing with an MTC-compatible MTR etc., use this
setting to make the song begin simultaneously.
Determines whether MIDI Song Position Pointer (F2), Start (FA),
Continue (FB), and Stop (FC) data will be transmitted and/or received by the RM1x.
When “OFF” none of the above data is transmitted or received.
When “IN” the above data is received only.
When “OUT” the above data is transmitted only.
When “IN/OUT” the above data is both transmitted and received.
Echo Back is a function by which data received at a MIDI IN connector is re-transmitted from a MIDI OUT connector. These parameters are the echo back settings.
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
■ MIDI sync setting :
Internal
MIDI
MTC
With a setting of Internal, the RM1x will use its own internal clock. Select this setting if you are using the RM1x by
itself or as the master device in a system that is synchronized by MIDI Clock messages.
With a setting of MIDI, the RM1x will be controlled by MIDI Clock messages received from MIDI IN. Select this setting
if you are using the RM1x as a slave device for synchronized play. This is the setting to use when synchronizing the
RM1x to an external MIDI device.
MTC is an acronym for MIDI Time Code, and is a type of timecode that can be exchanged between MIDI device via a
MIDI cable. MTC indicates time as “hours:minutes: seconds:frames”. One second consists of 30 frames.
The RM1x does not output MTC. If you wish to syncronize using MTC, you will need a device that is able to output
MTC such as Yamaha MD8.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
135
UTILITY MODE
Parameter
MIDI sync
2. MIDI Setup
■ Echo back settings :
Off
Through
RecMonitor
n
Echo back will not be performed.
When connecting the RM1x’s MIDI IN and MIDI OUT connectors to an external MIDI device, select Off.
Echo back will be performed from the MIDI OUT connector.
Echo back will be performed according to the Out Channel MIDI OUT settings of the Keyboard Track or the Recording
Track.
When using an external MIDI keyboard and external MIDI tone generator to record on RM1x’s tracks, select
RecMonitor.
• System exclusive messages of 128 bytes or longer will not be echoed back.
❏ page2
UTILITY MODE
Parameter
TG param out
OFF, ON
Values
Voice setup to TG
OFF, ON
Voice setup to MIDI
OFF, ON
Function
When parameter values are modified in Voice submode or Effect
submode, this setting specifies whether the operation will be transmitted in realtime from the MIDI OUT connector as MIDI data.
When set to OFF, MIDI will not be output.
Determines whether the corresponding voice and effect settings will
be sent to the RM1x tone generator when a song or style is selected. The voice and effect settings are sent to the tone generator
when this parameter is “ON.”
Determines whether the corresponding voice and effect settings will
be transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when a song or style is
selected. The voice and effect settings are transmitted via MIDI when
this parameter is “ON.”
* For information about how to change values, refer to the Basic Operation (page26).
136
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
3. MIDI Filter
3. MIDI Filter
MIDI Filter settings allow you to strip out specified types of MIDI events from the stream of MIDI data that passes through the
MIDI IN connector or MIDI OUT connector.
MIDI Filter settings apply to recording and playback of the sequencer block. They have no effect on the tone generator block.
The display indicates whether the corresponding type of MIDI event will be passed or cut.
The specified MIDI event will not be passed.
The specified MIDI event will be passed.
To uncheck or check a filter item, use the cursor buttons to highlight the desired check box, then use the [NO -1]
button to uncheck the box or the [YES +1] button to check the box.
Specify whether or not MIDI Note On and Note Off messages will be passed.
MIDI Note On messages are produced when a note of the keyboard is pressed, and Note Off messages when a note
is released. If these MIDI messages are cut, there will be no sound.
Pitch Bend
Specify whether or not MIDI Pitch Bend messages will be passed.
MIDI Pitch Bend messages are produced when the PITCH wheel (knob) is operated. They are used to smoothly
change the pitch.
Program Change Specify whether or not MIDI Program Change messages and the control change messages Bank Select MSB and
LSB will be passed.
Program Change, Bank Select MSB and LSB are MIDI messages used to select voices.
Control Change Specify whether or not MIDI Control Change messages will be passed.
MIDI Control Change messages convey many types of information, such as Modulation Wheel, Pan, and Volume.
Channel
Specify whether or not MIDI Channel Aftertouch messages will be passed.
Aftertouch
Polyphonic
Specify whether or not MIDI Polyphonic Aftertouch messages will be passed.
Aftertouch
System
Specify whether or not MIDI System Exclusive messages will be passed.
Exclusive
MIDI System Exclusive messages are used to reset the tone generator and to operate internal parameters.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
137
UTILITY MODE
Note
MEMO
UTILITY MODE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
138
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
APPENDIX
Specifications ........................................... 140
Troubleshooting ........................................ 142
Error Message .......................................... 144
Glossary .................................................. 146
Index ....................................................... 150
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
APPENDIX
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
139
1. Specifications
1. Specifications
Sequencer block
Data capacity
Note resolution
Polyphony
BPM (Tempo)
Recording method
Tracks
Patterns
Phrases
Pattern Chain
Songs
Edit
Jobs
Split
Groove
Play Fx
MIDI delay
Arpeggio
Sequence file formats
Demo song
approximately 110,000 notes
480 clocks per quarter note
64 notes
25.0 - 300.0
Realtime Recording (Replace)
Realtime Recording (Overdub)
Realtime Recording (Punch In) - only the Song mode
Step Recording
Grid Step Recording
Pattern :
16 tracks
Song :
16 tracks, BPM track
960 preset patterns (60 styles x 16 sections)
800 user patterns (50 styles x 16 sections)
Measures :
Up to 256
Over 7,000 preset phrases
256 user phrases/1 user style
20 chains
20 user songs
Phrase edit
Song edit
Pattern jobs :
36
Pattern chain jobs : 8
Song jobs :
28
Split song, Split pattern
Grid Groove (Note offset, Clock shift, Gate time offset, Velocity offset)
Harmonize (Unison, Octaver, Harmonize1, 2)
Play Fx (Beat stretch, Clock shift, Gate time, Velocity offset)
MIDI delay edit, Feedback edit
Type (Up, Down, Alternate1, 2, Random) , Sort, Hold, Octave range
RM1x native sequence format, SMF format 0
4 (Included disk)
Tone generator block
APPENDIX
Type
Maximum polyphony
Multi-timbral capability
Preset voices
Effects
Digital low boost
Controls
140
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
AWM2 tone generator
32 notes
16 timbres (with DVA)
Normal voices 654 ( except GM voices )
Drum voices 46 kits ( except GM kits )
3 systems (Reverb effect, Chorus effect, Variation effect)
Reverb
11 types
Chorus
11 types
Variation
43 types
_ 24dB)
Frequency (50Hz - 2.0kHz), Gain (+
Standby / On switch ( STANDBY / ON )
Volume control (VOLUME)
Assignable knobs ( x 8 )
Display knobs ( x 4 )
CONTRAST control
Mode buttons ( [PATTERN], [PATT CHAIN], [SONG], [UTILITY] )
Submode buttons ( [GROOVE], [PLAY FX], [MIDI DELAY], [ARPEGGIO],
1. Specifications
[VOICE], [VOICE EDIT], [EFFECT], [SETUP], [DISK], [JOB], [EDIT],
[SPLIT] )
Function buttons ( [F1] - [F4])
Knob A/B button
Eject button
Display button (Left, Right)
Sequencer buttons (p,s,e,r,f,t )
Data entry buttons ( [-1 NO], [+1 YES] )
Cursor buttons
Shift button
Keyboard mode buttons ( [TRACK], [TRANSPOSE], [NUM], [MUTE],
[SECTION] )
Arpeggio on button
Octave button ( [OCT DOWN] , [OCT UP] )
Keyboard pad ( E2 - F4 )
Tap tempo button
64 x 240 dot graphic LCD
(with CFL backlight, adjustable contrast)
LED indicators
MODE ( x 4) (green)
REC (red)
PLAY (green)
TRACK (x 16) (red)
KEYBOARD MODE - MUTE (red), SECTION (red),
ARPEGGIO ON (red)
FUNCTION BUTTON (red x 4)
KNOB A/B (red)
MIDI IN (red), MIDI OUT (green)
7 segments LED (x 4)
Connectors
PHONES (stereo phone jack)
OUTPUT (phone jack x 2) (L/MONO, R)
FOOT SW
DC IN
MIDI IN, MIDI OUT
Floppy disk drive
3.5 inch 2HD (MF2HD) and 2DD (MF2DD) types
Power supply
AC adaptor (PA-5C)
Dimensions
420 mm (W) x 282 mm (D) x 98 mm (H)
Weight
4.4kg
Included items
Power adaptor (PA-5C)
Floppy disk (Demo song)
Owner’s manual
APPENDIX
Display (LCD)
* Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for
improvement of the product.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
141
2. Troubleshooting
2. Troubleshooting
If you experience problems such as “no sound,” “incorrect sound,” or “sequencer does not operate,” please check the following
points before deciding that the unit is malfunctioning. In many cases, checking these points will help you solve the problem.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or the authorized distributor for your country.
Problem
Possible causes
page
No sound
• Is the volume raised sufficiently? ............................................................................................. Page 12
• Is the volume of each track raised? .......................................................................................... Page 63
• Is Note On data being filtered out by the MIDI filter? ............................................................. Page 137
• Are the effect settings wrong? .................................................................................................. Page 69
• Some filter cutoff frequency settings in the VOICE EDIT display can result in no sound. ..... Page 68
• Are tracks muted? ..................................................................................................................... Page 28
• Is the TO TG channel turned off? ............................................................................................ Page 75
• Have the speakers been disconnected? ..................................................................................... Page 17
• Does the playback data contain inappropriate Volume or Expression data? ............................ Page 46
• The Groove or PLAY FX velocity offset value may be set too low. .................................. Pages 55, 58
Sound is distorted • The volume may be turned up above clipping level. ................................................................ Page
• Have unneeded effects been set? .............................................................................................. Page
• Some filter resonance settings in the VOICE EDIT display can result in distorted sound ...... Page
• Is the gain of the Low Boost function set too high? ................................................................ Page
• Are you using a PLAY FX Harmonize “UNISON” setting?
This can sometimes sound like distortion. ................................................................................ Page
12
69
68
73
57
Pitch is different than the keyboard note that was played
• Is the Master Tune parameter set to an extreme value? ........................................................... Page 132
• Is the Note Shift setting other than 0? ...................................................................................... Page 47
• Is the Transpose setting other than 0? ...................................................................................... Page 46
• Is the Groove function set to offset any notes? ........................................................................ Page 55
• Make sure that the pitch bend knob is set to center (i.e. no pitch bend). ................................. Page 66
Notes are intermittently broken (notes sputter or stutter)
• Does the number of currently sounding notes exceed the maximum polyphony? .................. Page 37
Playback does not start when you press the PLAY p button.
• Does the selected song, pattern, or phrase contain data? ................................................. Pages 46, 116
• Is the MIDI Sync setting other than “INTR”? ......................................................................... Page 135
APPENDIX
Rhythm or note timing are played back differently than when recorded
• Are the Groove or Play FX settings being used? ............................................................... Pages 55, 58
When the pattern/song starts, the voice or effect settings that you have made disappear
• Does the beginning of the pattern/song contain data which resets the tone generator? ........... Page 136
• Has data (File type “TG Header” ) been loaded ? .................................................................... Page 43
Voice submode and Effect submode settings will be affected by the Control Change or Exclusive
data within a pattern/song.
Can’t hear the click sound
• In the Utility mode System page, is the Click turned off? ....................................................... Page 133
Can’t change the length of a phrase
• Are you attempting to change the length of an already-recorded phrase? ............................... Page 46
142
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
2. Troubleshooting
The memory is full even though there are still unused patterns/songs
• Are there songs or phrases containing large amounts of data? ................................................ Page 29
The memory capacity of the RM1x (approximately 110,000 notes) is for the total data of all songs
and phrases. This means that if there are songs or phrases which contain large amounts of data, the
memory may be full even though there are still unused songs or patterns.
Can’t record a phrase or song
• Have you selected a preset pattern or phrase?
You can only record to user patterns or phrases. ...................................................................... Page 46
• Is the Memory Protect turned on? ........................................................................................... Page 132
APPENDIX
Can’t receive or transmit MIDI bulk data
• Is the System exclusive interval time set to too small? ............................................................ Page 134
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
143
3. Error messages
3. Error messages
•Monitor
No Data
Illegal Input
Illegal Track Number
Illegal Phrase Number
Illegal Measure
Illegal Check Box
No F7 (End of Exc.)
Preset Phrase
Preset Pattern
Pattern Length Mismatch
Phrase Number Overflow
When a job is executed, this will appear if the selected track or area contains no data,
making the job invalid. Re-select the area.
This will appear in response to inappropriate operation or input. Check your input
method.
An unavailable or otherwise improper track number has been specified. Select a
different track.
An unavailable or otherwise improper phrase number has been specified. Select a
different phrase.
An unavailable or otherwise improper measure number has been specified. Select a
different measure number.
This message will appear if no check boxes are checked in any of the corresponding
track jobs. At least one check box must be checked.
This message indicates that no “End of Exclusive” byte (F7) was included with a
MIDI exclusive data entry or edit. Be sure to include F7.
This will appear when you attempt to edit a Preset Phrase. If you wish to edit a preset
phrase, you must first copy it to a User Phrase.
This will appear when you attempt to record to a Preset Pattern. You cannot record to
Preset Patterns.
A job has resulted in a pattern having more than the maximum of 256 measures.
All available user phrases (256 maximum) have been used up when recording,
executing a job, or editing.
•System
Backup Battery Low
Memory Full
Factory Set
APPENDIX
Memory Protect
This will appear when the internal backup battery of the RM1x has run down. Contact
nearest Yamaha dealer or the authorized distributer for your country to have the battery
replaced.
This will appear when internal memory is full and it is not possible to record, edit,
execute a job, receive MIDI, or load from floppy disk. Delete unneeded songs,
patterns, or user phrases, and try the operation once again.
After the power is switched ON, a system diagnosis is run on the RM1x’s system. If
the diagnosis finds the RAM to be defective, this message will appear and the memory
will be reset to its original factory settings. Data for User Song, User Patterns, and
User Phrases will all be eliminated.
You have attempted to execute a recording, editing, or job function when the UTILITY
mode Memory Protect function is ON.
•MIDI
Exc. Adrs Error
Exc. Data Error
MIDI Buffer Full
144
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
This appears when the received Exclusive data contains an address error.
This appears when the received Exclusive data contains a data size error.
This will appear when the MIDI reception buffer of the RM1x has filled up, and
processing is not possible. Try decreasing the amount of data or increasing the interval
time and transmit the data once again.
3. Error messages
•Disk
Disk Full
File Not Found
Bad Disk
(Y/N)
No Disk
Format Now?
Unformat
Format Now?
(Y/N)
Write Protected
Bad File
Illegal Format
Disk Changed
Can’t Change File Name
Illegal File
No Data
This will appear if the floppy disk is full and has no room to save the file. Either use a
new floppy disk, or delete unneeded files before trying the operation once again.
When loading, this will appear if the specified file does not exist in the floppy disk.
Insert the disk once again, and try the operation again.
The floppy disk is faulty. Press the [Yes +1] button to format the disk.
This indicates that the floppy disk is not correctly inserted into the RM1x. Insert the
floppy disk correctly.
This will appear if the floppy disk is not formatted. Press the [Yes +1] button to format
the disk.
This will appear if the write-protect slider of the floppy disk is in the write prohibit
position. Remove the floppy disk, close the write-protect slider, and try the operation
once again.
This will appear when you attempt to load a defective file.
This will appear if the floppy disk is of a format which the RM1x is not able to handle.
Check the contents of the disk.
This will appear if you have exchanged disks when you should not have. Try the
operation once again from the beginning.
When renaming, this will appear if the floppy disk already contains a file with a name
identical to the specified filename. Specify a different filename.
When loading, this will appear if the specified file cannot be handled by the RM1x.
Check the contents of the file.
When saving data to floppy disk, this will appear if the selected song or style contains
no data, and the save operation is invalid. Select a different song or style.
Can’t Undo. Ok? (Y/N)
Are you sure? (Y/N)
Completed
Executing...
If executing a job would fill up the internal memory so that Undo will not be available,
this message will appear. If you are sure that you will not need to Undo this job, press
the [YES +1] button. To cancel without executing the job, press the [NO -1] button,
and delete unneeded songs, patterns, or user phrases before trying the operation once
again.
Before an operation is executed, this message will ask you for confirmation. Use the
[YES +1]/[NO -1] button to either cancel or execute.
This will appear when the current process has been completed. Press any button and
the message will disappear.
When loading, saving, or formatting, this message will appear while the job is being
executed. Please wait.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
145
APPENDIX
•Messages other than error messages
4. Glossary
4. Glossary
A
D
Aftertouch: MIDI messages which are transmitted when additional
pressure is applied to the keyboard after notes are played.
Decay time: The time from when the maximum volume of a note is
reached until it falls to the sustain level.
Attack time: The time over which the volume rises from 0 when a
note is played until the maximum volume is reached.
Delay: An effect (or device) that delays an audio signal. The RM1x’s
Variation effect allows a delay to be applied.
AWM2 tone generation: A method of generating sound developed
by Yamaha which is based on digitally recorded waveforms.
Since it generates the complex waveform of actual acoustic
instruments, it provides extremely realistic sounds. Digital
filtering is also built-in, allowing precise control over the
tone. AWM2 is an acronym for Advanced Wave Memory 2.
Depth: The amount or degree of a setting or effect.
B
Bank number: A number which selects a variation voice from an
XG extension bank, relative to the voice selected by the
Program Number from the 128 voices of the XG basic bank
(GM system level 1)
Beat: When playing back or recording a song, one “beat” (a rhythmic
subdivision of a measure).
BPM (Beat Per Minute): The track containing data that determines
the playback tempo of the song.
Brilliance: A control or parameter that regulates the brightness of
the tone. The cutoff frequency of the RM1x’s filters can be
controlled to adjust the brilliance.
Bulk data: A type of System Exclusive message which contains a
collection of data for the internal settings of a device.
Bus line: A route (line) that carries audio signals from each part or
block. The bus lines of the RM1x include “SendVar ➔ Cho,”
“SendVar ➔ Rev” and “SendCho Rev,” and the stereo bus
line that collects the stereo output of each block.
Dry sound: The audio signal that is not processed by an effect.
Normally when using an effect, not all of the audio signal is
passed through the effect. Rather, the degree of the effect is
adjusted by mixing the sound that passes through the effect
(the wet sound) with the sound that bypasses the effect (the
dry sound).
Dump out: The process of transmitting bulk data as MIDI System
Exclusive messages.
E
Echo back: The action or process in which data received at the MIDI
IN connector is re-transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
Edit: The action of modifying or editing data.
Effect: A block (device) that processes the sound to add various
effects. The RM1x provides two system effects (reverb and
chorus), and one effect (variation) which can be used either
as a system effect or as insertion effect.
Element: A block within the AWM2 tone generator that generates a
sound. The voices of the RM1x consist of 1 to 2 elements.
Envelope Generator (EG): A block that modifies the level of the
tone generator from the moment that a note is played until
the sound decays to silence. The AEG controls the volume,
the PEG controls the pitch, and the FEG controls the filter.
C
Event: A single piece (such as Note On/Off or Program Change
messages) of the data which makes up a sequence.
Channel: The means by which the receiver receives only those MIDI
messages that are sent from the specified transmitter.
Exclusive: See the entry for System Exclusive.
Chorus: A type of effect that adds richness and depth to the sound,
similar to what happens when multiple sound sources are
heard simultaneously.
APPENDIX
Click: A metronome that is sounded when playing back or recording
on a sequencer.
Clock: A unit of timing resolution. On the RM1x, one clock is a
length of 1/480th of a quarter note.
Control change: A group of MIDI messages that are output when a
controller (modulation wheel, foot controller etc.) is operated.
Each controller has its own control number.
Cutoff frequency: Filters work by allowing the portion of the signal
lower than a given frequency to pass, and cutting the portion
of the signal above that frequency. This frequency is referred
to as the cutoff frequency.
146
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Expression: A MIDI control change message used to control the
volume of a part.
F
Filter: A block which modifies the tone by cutting the output of a
specific frequency portion of the sound. The RM1x has low
pass filters for each element of a voice, allowing the tone to
be made more mellow by cutting the higher overtones, or
brighter by allowing them to pass.
Floppy disk: A type of data storage media, available in varieties
such as 2DD and 2HD. In order for a device to be able to
write and read data to/from a floppy disk, the disk must be
formatted appropriately for that device.
Foot controller: A control device that can be used to control tone,
volume or effects etc. during a performance.
Formatting: The action of initializing a floppy disk so that it can be
used by a specific device.
4. Glossary
Gate time: The length of time that a note actually sounds.
GM:
A specification approved by the MIDI Standards Committee, standardizing the basic functionality of a tone generator,
and defining the number of voices and sounds, etc.
H
Hexadecimal: A system of numbering based on 16, in which the
digits increment in units of n-th powers of 16. The
alphabetical characters A – F are used to express the numbers
10 – 15.
I
Insertion (effect): An effect used in Voice submode as a major factor in the character of a sound. In Song mode, an insertion
effect will apply only to the specified part (unlike a system
effect), meaning that you can use the insertion effect “aggressively.”
Interval time: A delay time that is inserted at regular intervals when
transmitting bulk data that was recorded in a sequence track.
L
Length: On the RM1x this indicates the number of measures in the
selected phrase.
LFO: An acronym for Low Frequency Oscillator, a block that
produces a signal at a low frequency. The signal from the
LFO can be used to modulate pitch, volume or tone to produce
effects such as vibrato, tremolo and wah.
Load: The process of reading data from floppy disk into internal
memory.
Location: The place within a song at which notes will be input or
playback will be started, indicated as measure, beat, and
clock.
Low pass filter: A type of filter which cuts the high frequencies.
The sound can be brightened by raising the cutoff frequency
of the filter, or darkened by lowering it.
LSB:
An acronym for Least Significant Byte, referring to the lower
byte of data when MIDI control change data is divided into
two bytes for transmission.
M
Master tune: A parameter that adjust the overall tuning of the entire
device.
Maximum polyphony: The maximum number of notes that can be
played at once. The RM1x can produce 32 simultaneous notes
(counted in 1-element units). If MIDI messages are received
requesting more notes than the maximum polyphony allows,
currently sounding notes will be turned off, and the laterreceived notes will be played.
MDF3: The product name of a MIDI data filer. This device receives
data for the internal settings of a MIDI device in the form of
System Exclusive messages, and stores them to floppy disk.
Measure: A unit of musical duration consisting of several beats.
MIDI: An acronym for Musical Instruments Digital Interface, a
standard for transferring data between musical instruments.
Most electronic musical instruments today implement the
MIDI specification and provide MIDI connectors. Such instruments can be connected together to create remote performance or automatic performance systems.
MIDI data filer: A MIDI device that receives data for the internal
settings of a MIDI device in the form of System Exclusive
messages, and stores them to floppy disk. An example is the
Yamaha MDF3 MIDI data filer.
Modulation wheel: A controller that can be used to smoothly modify
the volume, tone or pitch while you perform.
MSB: An acronym for Most Significant Byte, referring to the upper
byte of data when MIDI control change data is divided into
two bytes for transmission.
Multi-timbral tone generator: A tone generator that can
simultaneously produce more than one type of sound.
Mute: A function that temporarily silences a track or reduces its
volume.
N
Note name: The name which specifies the pitch of a note, expressed
as a character, a sharp or flat symbol, and a number indicating
the octave.
NRPN: An acronym for Non Registered Parameter Number. These
are a type of MIDI control change message, and are used to
edit sounds via MIDI, allowing you to edit filter or EG
settings, or adjust the pitch or level for each instrument of a
drum voice.
O
Overdub: A method of realtime recording in which new material is
recorded without erasing previously recorded tracks.
P
Pan:
The parameter that sets the stereo location of a sound when
it is played back in stereo. (“Pan” or “panpot” are
abbreviations of “panoramic potentiometer.”) The pan
parameters found in Voice Edit, song play Multi, and Effect
Edit are linked.
Parameter: A setting or data item which you can modify in the
various mode and submode displays.
Patch: A screen page in Pattern mode that allows you to select and
playback patterns, and to create patterns by assigning phrases
to each track of the pattern.
Pattern: An accompaniment pattern consisting of drums, bass and
chord backing, created by connecting phrases end-to-end or
by vertically stacking up to16 parts.
Phrase: A unit of musical accompaniment played by a
accompaniment part; e.g., a rhythm pattern for the rhythm
part, a bass line for the bass part, or chord backing for the
guitar part. Phrases are the smallest unit from which the
accompaniment of a song is created.
Pitch bend: A type of MIDI message that smoothly modifies the
pitch.
Portamento: An effect that smoothly changes the pitch from one
note to another note. Higher settings of Portamento Time
will produce a slower change, and there will be no effect
with a setting of 0.
Program change: A MIDI message that selects a voice.
Program number: On the RM1x, a number specifying one of the
preset sounds.
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
147
APPENDIX
G
4. Glossary
Punch in recording: A method of realtime recording in which the
uses specifies the punch-in and punch-out points, so that recording takes place only in that area.
Q
Quantize: A function which “tightens up” the inexact timing of notes
or other events that were entered in realtime.
R
Realtime recording: A method of recording in which your
performance is recorded just as you play, similar to a
conventional multi-track recorder. Since the performance is
recorded as you play, the musical expression and nuances of
your performance will be accurately recorded.
Release time: The time over which the volume falls from the sustain
level (beginning at the moment a note is released) until it
reaches silence.
Replace: A method of realtime recording or punch recording in which
previously recorded data is erased (replaced) as new material
is recorded.
Resonance: A parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the
area of the cutoff frequency. By emphasizing the overtones
in this area, this can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone,
making the sound brighter and harder.
Reverb: An effect that simulates the acoustical reverberance of a
room or space. The sound that reaches our ear usually includes
not only the direct sound, but also sound that was reflected
off the walls or ceiling. Reverb creates these indirect
reflections artificially. Although some reflections can be
perceived individually as distinct echoes, the term “reverb”
usually refers only to the indistinct “wash” of reflected sound.
tween different sequencers. Most of today’s software and
hardware manufacturers provide software/hardware that can
read and write Standard MIDI Files.
Step recording: The method of recording in which music is input
by entering notes once by one, specifying the note length,
velocity, and pitch etc. of each note.
Stereo location: The location within the stereo field from which a
sound is heard. This can be modified by the Pan setting.
Style: The collective name for a set of 16 sections (A-P). Sections
are put together to create a backing pattern.
Synchronization: The function or process of matching the playback
or recording tempo of a device with a separate, external device
such as another sequencer or a rhythm machine.
Sync: See Synchronization.
System (effect): An effect which can be applied to all parts by
adjusting the Send Levels and Return Level. System effects
allow reverb or chorus etc. to be applied to the overall music.
The RM1x provides Reverb and Chorus as system effects.
The Variation effect can also be used as a system effect.
System exclusive message: A type of MIDI message used to
exchange data unique to a specific model or type of device.
T
Track: A location where musical performance data is recorded.
Transpose: Shifting the pitch in semitone steps.
Tremolo: An effect produced by cyclically modulating the volume.
Tuning: The process of matching the pitch of two or more instruments
when playing in an ensemble. Normally, A3 is tuned to 440
Hz.
RPN: An acronym for Registered Parameter Number. These MIDI
messages are used to set Part settings such as Pitch Bend
Sensitivity or Tuning.
U
S
V
Save: The process of saving data or songs from internal memory to
floppy disk.
Variation effect: One of the RM1X’s effects. In Voice submode, this
effect can be used aggressively as a major component of a
sound. The Variation effect can function either as an insertion effect or as a system effect, and provides a wide variety
of effect programs such as delay, rotary speaker, auto pan,
amp simulation and auto wah in addition to reverb and chorus.
Section: A term referring to each of the 16 types of patterns that
comprise a style. Patterns are selected by specifying the style
and the section.
APPENDIX
Send level: The amount of signal that is sent to a specified bus line
for processing by an effect. The amount of signal that is
returned from the effect is the “return level.”
Sensitivity: The degree to which an aspect of the sound (e.g., volume)
responds to a control (e.g., note velocity).
Sequencer: A block (or device) that records, edits, modifies, and
plays back a musical performance in the form of MIDI messages.
Sequence tracks: Tracks which record and playback normal MIDI
sequence data.
SMF: See the entry for Standard MIDI File.
Song: A musical composition created by recording performance
data on one or more tracks.
Standard MIDI File (SMF): SMF is an acronym for Standard MIDI
File; a format that allows easy exchange of song data be-
148
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Utility mode: A mode on the RM1x in which system or MIDI settings
can be made.
Velocity: A numerical value indicating the speed (force) with which
a note was played.
Vibrato: A performance effect produced by cyclically modifying the
pitch.
Voice: A sound that is built into the tone generator that can be selected and played.
Volume: A parameter or control that adjusts the volume. Track Volume adjusts the volume of each track, and Master Volume
adjusts the overall volume.
W
Wah effect: An effect that cyclically modulates the tone. The RM1x
produces this effect by using an LFO signal to modulate the
cutoff frequency of the filter.
4. Glossary
Wet sound: The audio signal that is processed by an effect. Normally when using an effect, not all of the audio signal is
passed through the effect. Rather, the degree of the effect is
adjusted by mixing the sound that passes through the effect
(the wet sound) with the sound that bypasses the effect (the
dry sound).
X
A tone generator format developed by Yamaha which expands
the GM specification to provide the richer expressiveness
and upward data compatibility that is demanded by today’s
more sophisticated computer peripheral environment.
APPENDIX
XG:
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
149
5. Index
5. Index
A
Append Pattern .......................................................................... 97
Append Phrase ........................................................................... 93
Arpeggio ............................................................................ 62, 119
Arpeggio block .......................................................................... 34
ARPEGGIO ON Button ............................................................ 13
Arpeggio Setting ................................................................ 62, 119
Attack ........................................................................................ 65
B
Bank number (MSB, LSB) ........................................................ 37
Beat Strech ................................................................................ 58
BPM Display ............................................................................. 11
C
APPENDIX
CC Events .................................................................................. 53
Chain Name ............................................................................. 114
Channel aftertouch ................................................................... 101
Chord Separate .................................................................. 89, 125
Chord Sort ......................................................................... 88, 125
Chorus edit ........................................................................ 71, 121
Chorus effect ............................................................................. 39
Clear Chain .............................................................................. 114
Clear Pattern .............................................................................. 98
Clear Phrase ............................................................................... 95
Clear Song ............................................................................... 128
Clear Track ........................................................................ 96, 127
Click beat ................................................................................. 133
Click mode .............................................................................. 133
Clock shift ................................................................................. 58
CONTRAST Control ................................................................. 14
Control Change ........................................................................ 101
Controller block ................................................................... 34, 38
Convert to Song ....................................................................... 114
Copy Chain .............................................................................. 114
Copy Event ................................................................ 89, 113, 125
Copy Pattern .............................................................................. 97
Copy Phrase ............................................................................... 92
Copy Song ............................................................................... 128
Copy Track ........................................................................ 95, 127
Create Continuous Data ..................................................... 91, 126
Create Measure ................................................................ 113, 126
Create Roll ......................................................................... 88, 125
Crescendo .......................................................................... 86, 125
Cursor Buttons ........................................................................... 12
Cutoff ......................................................................................... 68
D
Data backup ............................................................................... 43
DC IN Jack ................................................................................ 14
Decay ......................................................................................... 65
Delay ................................................................................. 60, 119
Delay level ................................................................................. 60
150
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Delay time ................................................................................. 60
Delete Measure ................................................................ 113, 127
Delete/Format/Information ........................................ 79, 111, 122
Disk ........................................................................... 76, 111, 122
Disk-in-use indicator ................................................................. 15
DISPLAY Buttons ..................................................................... 12
Display Knobs ..................................................................... 12, 26
Divide Drum Track ............................................................ 97, 128
Dry level .................................................................................... 64
E
Echo back settings ................................................................... 136
Edit .................................................................................... 99, 128
Edit view .................................................................................. 133
Editable Event Parameters ....................................................... 101
Effect ................................................................................. 69, 120
Effect block ......................................................................... 34, 39
Effect Send ................................................................................ 64
EG ...................................................................................... 65, 120
Eject button ................................................................................ 15
Erase Event ........................................................................ 90, 113
Event .................................................................................. 89, 113
Event chase .............................................................................. 134
Exchange Phrase ........................................................................ 93
Exchange Track ................................................................. 96, 127
Exclusive ................................................................................. 102
EXIT Button .............................................................................. 13
Extract Event ..................................................................... 90, 126
F
Feedback ............................................................................ 61, 119
Filter .................................................................................. 68, 120
floppy disk ................................................................................. 42
Floppy disk drive ....................................................................... 15
Floppy disk slot ......................................................................... 15
FOOT SW Jack .......................................................................... 14
Footswitch funciton list ........................................................... 132
Frequency .................................................................................. 73
Front panel ................................................................................. 11
Function Buttons ................................................................. 12, 27
Function tree .............................................................................. 32
G
Gain ........................................................................................... 73
Gate time ................................................................................... 59
Get Phrase .................................................................................. 94
Glide .................................................................................. 87, 125
Grid Groove ....................................................................... 55, 119
Groove ............................................................................... 55, 119
H
Harmonize ......................................................................... 57, 119
Hold ........................................................................................... 62
5. Index
I
Numeric POINTER Display ...................................................... 53
Indicators ................................................................................... 12
Insertion Effects ......................................................................... 39
O
Job ............................................................................. 80, 112, 123
Job List ...................................................................... 80, 112, 123
Jump .................................................................................. 46, 116
K
Keyboard ................................................................................... 13
Keyboard Mode Buttons ............................................................ 13
Keyboard Modes ........................................................................ 27
Knob .......................................................................................... 12
Knob Assign ...................................................................... 74, 121
KNOB Buttons .......................................................................... 12
L
L/MONO & OUTPUT Jacks ..................................................... 14
LCD Display .............................................................................. 11
LCD mode ............................................................................... 133
LED display ............................................................................. 133
LFO ................................................................................... 67, 120
Load ........................................................................... 77, 111, 122
Low Boost ......................................................................... 73, 121
M
Main Modes ............................................................................... 23
Master tune .............................................................................. 132
Maximum polyphony ................................................................ 37
Measure ........................................................................... 113, 126
Memory protect ....................................................................... 132
MIDI Data Monitors .................................................................. 11
MIDI delay ........................................................................ 60, 119
MIDI Filter .............................................................................. 137
MIDI IN & OUT Connectors .................................................... 14
MIDI Setup .............................................................................. 135
MIDI sync setting .................................................................... 135
Mix Phrase ................................................................................. 93
Mix Track ................................................................................ 127
MODE and SUBMODE Buttons .............................................. 12
Modes ........................................................................................ 23
Modify Control Data ......................................................... 92, 126
Modify Gate Time ............................................................. 85, 124
Modify Velocity ................................................................. 84, 124
Mute Memory ............................................................................ 28
MUTE (SOLO) .......................................................................... 28
N
[NO - 1] and [YES + 1] Buttons .......................................... 12, 26
Normalize Play Effect ....................................................... 96, 127
Note ........................................................................... 82, 101, 124
Note Display .............................................................................. 53
Note shift ................................................................................... 47
NRPN ...................................................................................... 102
NUM .......................................................................................... 27
Numeric Entry ........................................................................... 26
Octaver ....................................................................................... 57
OCT DOWN and OCT UP Buttons ..........................................13
Out Channel ....................................................................... 75, 121
Overdub ............................................................................. 51, 118
P
PAD Entry .................................................................................. 53
PAD VELO ................................................................................ 46
Pan ............................................................................................. 63
Patch .......................................................................................... 47
Pattern .................................................................................. 35, 97
PATTERN CHAIN MODE ....................................................... 32
PATTERN CHAIN Playback ................................................... 110
PATTERN MODE ..................................................................... 32
PATTERN Playback .................................................................. 46
Pattern Quantize ...................................................................... 132
PB Events .................................................................................. 53
PHONES Jack ........................................................................... 14
Phrase .................................................................................. 35, 92
Phrase category .......................................................................... 35
Phrase Name .............................................................................. 95
Phrase Number .......................................................................... 35
Pitch Bend ................................................................. 66, 101, 120
Play FX ........................................................................ 57, 58, 119
Playback .................................................................................... 46
Polyphonic aftertouch .............................................................. 102
Portamento ......................................................................... 66, 120
Program change ....................................................................... 101
Program number (Voice number) ..............................................37
Punch In ................................................................................... 118
Put Phrase .................................................................................. 95
Q
Quantize ............................................................................. 82, 124
R
Realtime Controller Konbs .................................................. 12, 29
Realtime Recording (Punch In) ............................................... 118
Realtime Recording (Replace, Overdub) ..........................51, 118
Rear panel .................................................................................. 14
Recording Count ...................................................................... 133
Recording .......................................................................... 49, 117
Recording type .......................................................................... 50
Release ....................................................................................... 65
Rename ...................................................................... 78, 111, 122
Repeat times .............................................................................. 60
Replace .............................................................................. 51, 118
Resonance .................................................................................. 68
Reverb edit ......................................................................... 71, 121
Reverb effect .............................................................................. 39
RPN ......................................................................................... 102
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
151
APPENDIX
J
5. Index
S
Save ........................................................................... 76, 111, 122
Section ................................................................................. 28, 35
Sequencer block ................................................................... 34, 35
Sequencer Buttons and Indicators ............................................. 13
Setup .................................................................................. 73, 121
SHIFT Button ........................................................................... 13
Shift Clock ......................................................................... 89, 125
SMF(Standard MIDI File) ......................................................... 43
Song Name .............................................................................. 128
song data .................................................................................... 43
song files .................................................................................... 43
SONG MODE ................................................................... 32, 115
SONG Playback ...................................................................... 116
Song Split (Song to Pattern) .................................................... 129
Sort ............................................................................................ 62
Split ................................................................................. 108, 129
Split Pattern ............................................................................... 98
Split Phrase ................................................................................ 94
STANBY Switch ....................................................................... 14
Step Recording .................................................................. 52, 118
Step Recording (Grid) ....................................................... 54, 118
Style ........................................................................................... 35
style data .................................................................................... 43
style files .................................................................................... 43
Style Name ................................................................................ 98
Submodes .................................................................................. 23
System ..................................................................................... 132
System Effects ........................................................................... 39
System exclusive interval time ................................................ 134
System Initialization .................................................................. 30
T
TAP/ENTER Button .................................................................. 13
TG Header ................................................................................. 43
Thin Out ............................................................................ 91, 126
Time stretch ....................................................................... 92, 126
Tone generator block ........................................................... 34, 37
Track ............................................................................ 27, 95, 127
Transpose ..................................................................... 27, 87, 125
Type ................................................................................... 69, 120
APPENDIX
U
Unde/Redo ........................................................... 29, 82, 113, 124
Unison ....................................................................................... 57
Used Memory display ............................................................... 29
UTILYTY MODE ............................................................. 33, 131
V
Variation edit ..................................................................... 70, 121
Variation effect .......................................................................... 39
Velocity offset ............................................................................ 59
View Filter ....................................................................... 107, 128
Voice .................................................................................. 63, 120
Voice Balance .................................................................... 63, 120
Voice Edit .......................................................................... 65, 120
Voices ........................................................................................ 37
152
RM1x SEQUENCE REMIXER
Volume ....................................................................................... 63
Volume Control ......................................................................... 12
X
XG NRPN ................................................................................ 103
XG RPN .................................................................................. 103
XG system exclusive (drum) ................................................... 106
XG system exclusive (effect) ................................................... 104
XG system exclusive (multi) ................................................... 105
XG system exclusive (system) ................................................. 104
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à
Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la
liste suivante.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más
cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620, U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panama S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización
Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: 507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co.
Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411
BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Professionnelle
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain
Tel: 91-577-7270
GREECE
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens,
Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
ASIA
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
#131-31, Neung-Dong, Sungdong-Ku, Seoul
Korea
Tel: 02-466-0021~5
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
SINGAPORE
FINLAND
Warner Music Finland OY/Fazer Music
Aleksanterinkatu 11, P.O. Box 260
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 0435 011
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of
Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
Blk 202 Hougang, Street 21 #02-01,
Singapore 530202
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2713-8999
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317
OCEANIA
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205,
Australia
Tel: 3-699-2388
NEW ZEALAND
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division
SY18
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2445
M.D.G.,EMI Division, ©Yamaha Corporation 1998
V343990 810CMIT18.2-02B0 Printed in Japan